Home

Nissan 2009 Altima Automobile User Manual

1. 3 24 ISOFIX child restraints 1 25 J Jump starting s o i esce re Bek mii de as a 6 7 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 25 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 12 3 18 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 11 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 58 Language setting 004 4 6 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System 04 1 25 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Light Air bag warning light 1 58 2 14 Brake light See stop light 8 28 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 8 28 Charge warning light 2 11 Console MON sa aa a e wade aa 2 49 Fog MON SWIC icsi ais i o h ea wee 3 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights a aaa 8 27 mtenor NGI to s aae a a ee aa 2 48 Light bulbs a noo 8 27 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low washer fluid warning light 2 23 Passenger air bag and status light 1
2. 9 10 Emission control information label 9 11 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Installing front license plate 2 0000 9 12 Vehicle loading information 005 9 12 TOWNS sc doses A AE T esp ence E 9 12 Vehicle load capacity s2 e secur ceeeeceeeeee nt 9 13 Loading WS e24cdenerseeeceeneeenoceqey EE 9 15 Measurement of weights 22 5 9 15 TOWING atalei 22 4 Bander eagee terete sense se ecees 9 16 Maximum load limits 2 222 c50 vs anaana 9 16 Towing load specification 00 00e 9 19 TOWING Solely 4s2cecceecraneeresededrenws E 9 19 Plat WOWMG mets aneeeou epee cece euseeeesaeeess 9 23 Uniform tire quality grading 2 20 5 9 24 Emission control system warranty 5 9 25 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 26 Event Data Recorders EDR 0cceeeeeaes 9 97 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 27 In the event of a collision 5 9 28 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Fuel Engine
3. Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System later in this section amp Bluetooth 5 E Settings gt Phone 8 21 Back G Settings 8 21 Back Back Delete Call Logs i oF ay Phone Ringer Vol MUMM Zi Navigation Volume Tones Phone neoming vol Eie iM a Use Vehicle Ringtone Voice Recognition Language Units Bluetocth Setup i Please select an item PAIRING PROCEDURE 5 When the pairing is completed the screen will return to the Bluetooth setup display 1 Press the SETUP button then touch the Phone
4. button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END _ button to select a dif ferent language 3 Press the button For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker adaptation SA mode later in this section 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE You must press the amp F button or the button within 5 seconds to change the language Press A l PHONE SEND to select Press Si PHONE END to select Current language 5 Ifyou decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Pairing procedure NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Setup A Pair phone New phone Initiate from handset Name phone Assign priority Choose ringtone 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Setup The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Pair phone B The system acknowl edges the command and
5. Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is act
6. Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position 2 4 Instruments and controls RPMx1G00 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required Instruments and controls 2 5 The f indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the
7. Shoulder belt height adjustment Sedan front seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position 2 so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul der belt anchor into position The shoulder belt comfort assist arm can be adjusted to the position best for you See Pre cautions on seat belt usage earlier in this sec tion To adjust move the arm up as indicated AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Shoulder belt guide Coupe The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier access to the shoulder belt The arm can also be folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier access SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is no
8. Defrosting Defogging Air passed through heater core Fan Temperature control dial ae a lay RR m D Air recirculation Air conditioner button button f Temp Air flow recirculation button control control HOT OFF Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 Bi level Heating Air passed through heater Fan Air flow control dial modes Fam we m Temperature control dial Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Fan ae Air flow recirculation control button control HOT gt o OFF OFF Heating Fan E Air flow modes Air passed through heater core Temperature control dial Arr an Air recirculation button button Air recirculation button Temp control HOT QRP RIGHT Air conditioner Air flow control Heating amp Defrosting Defogging Air passed through heater Fan Temperature control dial BEE een Ey Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Air ran recirculation A C Heme control button button control HOT OFF Air flow control 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Cooling if so equipped Fan Air recirculation button recirculation button Air flow Cl Air not passed through heater core Temperature control dial art Iny Air conditioner button Air flow control Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 H
9. Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception COMPACT AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognit
10. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 29 MEMO 5 30 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency PUIG EE EE E E E TE T ETENE 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat tire nananana 6 2 Jomp Staring eserse sarinre niied EnEn Enen Ri 6 7 Pus stalin an eseeaqeeseash eee extese nun sates 6 9 If your vehicle overheats 220020eee eee 6 9 Towing your VehiCl sce secsias ie edadepeveeniceee 6 10 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 11 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will acti vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible remind ers in
11. To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to N Neutral manual transmission or to P Park CVT Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner if so equipped Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed In case of emergency 6 9 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling
12. Traction Control System TCS off indicator light in the Instruments and controls sec tion of this manual f a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and indicator come on in the instrument panel lights As long as these lights are on the traction control function is canceled The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system AWARNING The Traction Control System is de signed to help maintain traction with the road surface but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering opera tion at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the Traction Control System may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs bushings and wheels are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated the Traction Control System may not operate prop erly and the indicator light may come on Starting and driving 5 25 When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the Traction Control System may not operate properly and the indica tor light may come on Do not drive on the
13. AWARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
14. Rear seat P 1 9 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details illustrated table of contents 0 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL La 1 Vents P 4 10 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn if so equipped Bluetooth hands free signal switch P 2 29 phone system if so equipped P 4 44 P 4 46 P 4 61 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 0 8 Illustrated table of contents Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 43 P 2 34 Cruise control main set switch P 5 19 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 27 Ignition switch P 5 7 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 33 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 53 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 43 Glove box P 2 41 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 Heater and air conditioner manual or automatic P 4 11 P 4 18 Shift selector P 5 11 Audio system controls if so equipped Storage if so equipped P 4 21 P 2 42 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 27 Vehicle information display controls P 2 17 Hood release P 3 23 20 Traction Control System TCS OFF switch if so equipped P 5 25 Trunk opener P 3 23 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch if so equipped P 2 35 Intelligent Key port P 5 7 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual
15. The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear posi tions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or ACC position 5 12 Starting and driving To move the shift selector Push the button while depressing the brake pedal ES Push the button to shift O gt Shift without pushing button Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector from P Park to any of the desired shift positions AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse
16. The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Also see Pairing procedure earlier in this section for additional information Up to 5 phones can be paired If you try to pair a sixth phone the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle s system the system an nounces the name the phone is already using The pairing procedure will then be cancelled When prompted by the system choose from the following commands New phone Refer to Pairing a phone earlier in this section Replace phone The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace the pairing procedure will begin Refer to Pairing procedure earlier in this section List phone See the description below List phone Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired If no phones are paired the system announces No paired phones to list The system then ends the VR session Select phone Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem are in the
17. To change gears or when upshifting or down shifting depress the clutch pedal fully shift into the appropriate gear then release the clutch slowly and smoothly To ensure smooth gear changes fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec tor If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted a gear noise may be heard Transmission damage may occur Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd 3rd 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed To back up lift up on the shift selector ring and then move it to the R Reverse position after stopping the vehicle completely The shift selector ring returns to its original position when the shift selector is moved to the N Neutral position If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R Reverse or 1 1st shift into N Neutral then release the clutch pedal Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R Reverse or 1 1st Suggested upshift speeds The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions the weather and individual driving habits For normal acceleration in low altitude areas less than 4 000 ft 1219 ml For QR25DE GEAR CHANGE ACCEL shift CRUISE shift point MPH point MPH km h km h 1st to 2nd 15 24 8 24 2nd t
18. 2 34 Instruments and controls HORN To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel AWARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury HEATED SEAT if so equipped The front seats are warmed by built in heaters if so equipped The switches are located on the center console 1 Start the engine 2 Push the low or high position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch Is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If
19. 224 9 2 Clutch iud oe soe aa oboe i oad 8 14 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid aa 8 13 Engine Coolant 240k sso tarea si 8 8 Engine oil fase who oe oo ee we ee 8 9 Power steering fluid 8 13 Window washer fluid 8 15 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Fog light swith o e sso sadora aoa 3 2 33 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 52 Froni seals e csere eae oe wed prinia 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants ce eee wee we ES 9 2 Fuel economy aao 5 21 Fuel gauge 2 aioe aa 2 6 Fuel octane rating saaa oaa aa 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Fuel filler cap aoao aa 3 25 Fuel filler door and cap sasaaa aaa 3 25 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 25 Fuel filler lid gt aa a 2 ae 2 eee me Owe we 3 25 PUSES aes memea Ea eS 8 22 FUSIDIG MKS 2 4 aima a Ree Se A 8 23 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal TKaNSCEINE oes seda wea a terasas 2 51 Gas Gape e aa a ae ee ee a 3 25 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 FUOLGAUOO 2 s aea eS aom Se Rh ae eo 2 6 Odometer 4 6 0 ede oa ae a de a 2 4 Speedometer 0000 2 4 Tachometer a wa oo pob oe pa Ree Ge 2 5 Trip odometer in a dow SE oa we em aoe 8 2 4 General maintenance 8 2 Glove box 2 2 2 41 Glove box lock a 2 lt a ae om dew amp amp ae amp 2 41 Grocery hooks wa 6 Sone e ae ES 2 43 H
20. ATE THE EQUIPMENT LIC0474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH MIST KO OFF SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer switch oper ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the switch toward A Slower or Faster Also for vehicles equipped with speed dependent wipers the intermittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation speed will be faster 2 Low continuous low speed operation 3 High continuous high speed operation Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera tion of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washe
21. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil larity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the
22. Hands free phone system Bluetooth 5c a au om a ee Gon Ge amp eo eS 4 46 4 61 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights 020000 8 27 Heated seats 2 0008 2 34 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls ix 2 ans Kae GR 4 11 4 18 Heater operation 4 12 4 19 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 51 Hood release aoaaa 3 23 FROMM int ve 5 1 18 Gs 1a Sew a a eo 2 34 l Ignition Switch Push Button Ignition Switch 5 7 Immobilizer system 2 eee 2 26 3 3 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 24 248 dom 2a Op 8 19 Increasing fuel economy 5 21 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 1 0 0 0 eee eee eee 9 10 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 29 Inside mirror 2 ee ee 3 28 Instrument brightness control 2 32 Instrument panel 0 8 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 32 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 8 3 18 Key operation 044 3 9 Mechanical key 2 2 0 ee ee ee 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation 3 12 3 18 Troubleshooting guide 3 16 3 22 Warning signals 2 441 es 3 16 3 22 Interior light oe wwe a et Ee a 2 48 Interior trunk lid release
23. Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Do
24. THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommen
25. The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Technical and consumer information 9 5 Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in
26. button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KOVS s scp ae narid Enana Erne a E ee ae wetene eee EER NISSAN Intelligent Key 22 00005 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys DG Ol Ss eae sok tease det oe tens eee eae ee eases Locking With Keys terete ode Ase educa ensen ous Locking with inside
27. ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis sion parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Continuously Variable Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufac turer s recommendations when using their prod uct Technical and consumer information 9 23 Manual Transmission Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral e After towing 500 miles 805 km start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neu tral for two minutes Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles 805 km of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts 9 24 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 1
28. is a compressed audio format created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once Is called a multisession e ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag infor mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis FOLDER tered trademarks and trademarks in the United MP3 or WMA States of America and other countries of Mi crosoft Corporation of the USA Playback order chart 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition sy
29. side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials m aai AF rr WPD0432 Coupe shown Sedan similar Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch 1 again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing operations Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position 3 12 Pre driving c
30. tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 LDIO564 VQ35DE engine Power steering fluid pump Generator Air conditioner Crank pulley le ae 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself SPARK PLUGS REPLACING SPARK PLUGS lridium tipped spark plugs if so equipped It is not necessary to replace iridium tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap ping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer for assistance AIR CLEANER LDIO562 Type A The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth To remove the air cleaner filter push the tabs and pull the unit upward LDIO563 Type B
31. 33 PSI P235 45R18 Spare Tire T135 70R16 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire P215 65R15 95H speed rating 6 R 15 t t 3 4 5 WDI0395 Example 1 Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 4 R The R stands for radial 1 Two digit number 65 This number P The P indicates the tire is de 5 Two digit number 15 This number signed for passenger vehicles not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches tires have this information 6 Two or three digit number 95 This Three digit number 215 This num number is the tire s load index It is a ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight the tire from sidewall edge to side each tire can support You may not wall edge find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT t 1 XX t 3 XX t 2 XXX
32. Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations 9 6 Heater and air conditioner controls 5 2 amp amp Bank amp o wnt ac 4 11 4 18 Servicing airconditioner 4 20 Air flow charts 0000 4 14 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 25 Anchor point locations 1 27 AMENNA e s a aena Sw e Bee a A 4 45 Anti lock brake warning light aaa 2 11 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 24 ArmreSiS 44 46 bee awe Sao s ORG SH 1 11 Audible reminders 4 2 16 Audio system ou s ew one amp wk eH Bd we ie 4 21 Compact Disc CD changer 4 34 4 40 Compact disc CD player 4 29 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player 2 000 4 27 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer 3242528669 4 31 4 38 RACO oe ee eee cn ee a ee oe ee 4 21 Autolight switch amp wd oe a Be we ew BG 2 30 Automatic Automatic power window switch 2 45 Transmission selector lever lock release stu x ee ae ee Gee ores oe 5 14 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 29 Automatic door locks 3 5 AUX jack occa a Be oe aa 4 30 4 36 4 42 B BAON ee ee ee a 8 15 Charge warning light 2 11 Before starting the engine 5 10 Belt See drive belt aoaaa aa aaa 8 17 Block heater ENOG 6 s a e a ee ee 5 29 Bluetooth hands free phone
33. If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS if so equipped When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip With the vehicle Traction Control System TCS sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle road traction When the TCS is operating the SLIP indicator in the instrument panel blinks lf the SLIP indicator blinks the vehicle may be under slippery conditions Be sure to drive carefully See Slip indicator light and
34. Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 sec onds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is
35. The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hour under the following conditions all doors are closed shift selector is in P Park The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur any door is opened shift selector is moved out of the P Park ignition switch changes position ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe riod This can discharge the battery NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis charged the guide light A of the Intelligent Key port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve hicle information display See Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section In this case inserting the Intelligent Key into the port B allows you to start the engine Make sure the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc tion The front side faces upward and the key ring side fac
36. To deactivate or activate the automatic door lock or unlock system per form the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 3 Do one of the following within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 To change AUTO UNLOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch to the position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds To change AUTO LOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch to the position LOCK for more than 5 seconds 4 When activated the hazard warning lights will flash twice When deactivated the haz ard warning lights will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Sedan only Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the unlock position the door can be opened from the outside or the inside When the lever is in the lock position the door can be opened only from the out side NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITH DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES AWARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric m
37. age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section Slip indicator light if so equipped This indicator light will blink when the traction control system if so equipped or vehicle dy namic control system is limiting wheel spin Slip pery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on If this happens adjust your driving accordingly Instruments and controls 2 15 The slip indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light does not c
38. fan can start at any time 6 10 Incase of emergency 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual SCE0199A TOWING RECOM
39. i Please select an item Priority Change If multiple phones are registered to the sys tem you can change the priority of the phones on the shown list Remove Paired Phone Delete a registered cellular phone from the paired list Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name vehicle name device address device PIN and connection status Edit Phone Name If you would like to change the way your phone s name is displayed select this key a character input screen will be displayed NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle such as the phone and navigation systems To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press the amp button located on the steering wheel Then speak the command for the system you wish to activate The command given is picked up by the microphone and it is performed when it is properly recognized At this time NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice and message in the center display to inform you of the command results USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the sys tem is ready to accept voice commands If the button is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage Phonetic data downloaded Please w
40. if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF PG or 2 position Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located on the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sen sor controls the autolight if it is covered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Headlight beam select C To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the 0 light illuminates 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the Pd or 2 position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes Instruments and controls 2 31 A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery D
41. it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Ifthe hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions
42. key 2 Scroll to the bottom of the list and touch the Bluetooth Setup key 3 Touch the Pair Phone key then touch one of the None Add New keys 4 When a PIN code appears on the screen operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for the details Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 21 4 Back E Settings gt Pair Phone 8 21 Back E Settings gt Phone 8 21 Back VAS Bluetooth Handsfree Phonebonk Please start pairing from your Paired Phone List Bluetooth phone When phone Downloaded Phonebook requests PIN please enter 1234 Pair Phone Delete Call Logs cane Phone Ringer vo MUMM iilii Phone Incoming Vol M a i Please select an item i Please select an item Priority Change Remove Paired Phone i Please select an item PHONE DOWNLOAD Up to 70 phone numbers can be stored in the phonebook 1 Press the SETUP button then touch the Phone key 2 Touch the Phonebook key 3 Touch one of the None Add New keys from the name list of the phonebook 4 Touch the Bluetooth key in order to trans fer a phonebook entry from your cellular phone to your phonebook in your car 4 64 Monitor climate audi
43. lt i aee de ee Oh a a 3 27 Voice recognition system aaau oaa 4 69 WwW Warning Air bag warning light 1 58 2 14 Anti lock brake warning light 2 11 Battery charge warning light 2 11 Brake warning light 2 11 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 23 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low washer fluid warning light 2 23 Passenger air bag and status light 1 53 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Vehicle security system 2 25 Warning labels for SRS Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 1 ee ee ee Warming lights o s a a aw ke ee we a aa Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch Weights See dimensions and weights Wheels andtires Wheel tire size 205 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country 2 002 ee eae Window washer fluid Windows Locking passengers windows Power rear windows Power windows Rear power windows Windshield wiper and washer switch Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch Wiper blades i 0 5 4 0 658 4 fa ue wo 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL For 2 5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock In
44. matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF The occupant classification sensor pattern sen sor is in the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could
45. t Example 4 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire 3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure 5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indica
46. 14v Glove box light 1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information 2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself Coupe 1 Mirror mounted turn signal light if so equipped Interior light Map light Headlamp assembly Fog light if so equipped Step light High mount stoplight Trunk light License plate light O Rear combination light ODNDOWARWN Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself Sedan 2 oO Sey SS Rear map light Front map light Step light Headlamp assembly Fog light if so equipped High mount stoplight if so equipped Trunk light Spoiler mounted stoplight if so equipped Rear combination light License plate light Mirror mounted turn signal light if so equipped Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens light and or cover 4 Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation LDI0341 Step light Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 000 000 0 LDIO571 WDI0632 Map light Interior light Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself Rear combination light To access the bulbs in the rear combination light CQ Remo
47. A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving Manual shift mode When the shift selector is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manu ally In the manual shift mode the shift range is dis played on the position indicator in the meter When shifting the shift selector to the manual shift gate the position indicator displays 1 first up to 6 sixth depending on vehicle speed Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows 12364865866 6 Sixth Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds 5 Fifth Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes 4 Fourth 3 Third and 2 Second Use for hill climbing or engine braking on d
48. A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake Shift the manual transmission into R Reverse or the CVT into P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R Reverse or the CVT is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench 2 from the tool box In case of emergency 6 3 Turn the clamp
49. CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed MP3 or WMA file not supported UN PLAYABLE TRACK Go to next track CD ROM No Audio Track Eject disc and go to the last mode CD player only Go to next disc CD changer only 3 TEMP MECH ERROR PRESS EJECT READ FOCUS ERROR CHECK DISC CHECK DISC Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA CD Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA
50. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated E Lower the vehicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire and loading information label affixed to the driver side center pillar 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 Place the spare tire c
51. Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb if so equipped AWARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they pro duce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disas semble Always have your xenon head lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instru ments and controls section Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer e Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering the headlight body may affect bulb performanc
52. Electric control type The outside mirror remote control only operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Rotate the control lever to select the right or left mirror Adjust the mirror to the desired position by moving the control lever Heated mirrors if so equipped Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instrument and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 Manual folding outside mirrors if so equipped Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments MEMO Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons if so equipped 4 2 Setting up the start up screen cece ee 4 3 How to use the SETUP button 4 3 D button 00 eve eee cece cence rraren 4 7 RearView Monitor if so equipped 0008 4 8 How to read the displayed lines 4 8 Adjusting the SCreen 0 cece eee ees 4 9 Operating lS wane ce neers we hace been deters 4 9 VONIS Scccceveceddae aedececaendtechadeacenade aes 4 10 Heater and air conditioner manual if SO equipped n ccc cece ees 4 11 COMM e sesh cerageccucuueuesaeeereny E a ee 4 11 Heater operatio
53. F 2 C This dehu midifies the air which helps defog the windshield The mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger com partment to further improve the defogging perfor mance 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Operating tips Keep the windows and moonroof closed while the air conditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF posi tion for heating and defrosting
54. Fail ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depress ing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment NOTE Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion 4 Stop the vehicle completely before placing the shift selector in the P Park position Starting and driving 5 11
55. If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the
56. Language Units Select Language English Select Units U Change system language and units Language units The following display will appear when pressing the SETUP button then touching the Language Units key Settings gt Select Language 8 21 English Fran ais Select language Select Language Touch the Select Language key From the fol lowing display select the English ON key or the Fran ais ON key for your language preference If you select the Fran ais key French language will be displayed To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manual Service Manual order information in the Technical and consumer information section Settings gt Select Units 8 21 oC i Select units Select Units Touch the Select Units key From the following display select the US ON key or the Metric ON key for your units preference Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C L 100 km The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by touching the Back key Phone settings For information on the phone settings see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation if so equipped later in this section Voice recognition settings For information on the voice recognition settings see Voice Recognition System if so equipped later in this section Audio settings For information on the a
57. Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and MP3 WMA files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc is protected by copyright 5 F i Check if the disc is scratched or dirty oor sound qualit cai Bit rate may be too low It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or s
58. P warning light appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously The ignition switch is eee in the ACC eee Place the ignition switch in the OFF position The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli port gent Key port The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position The ignition switch is placed in the ACC position and the shift selector is not in the P Park position The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the shift selector is not in the P Park position Place the ignition switch in the OFF position Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion and place the ignition switch in the OFF position Move the shift selector to the P Park position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock trunk The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you trunk A door is not closed securely Close the door securely The door handle request switch is pushed Push the door handle request switch after before the door is closed the door is closed The outside chime sounds for approximately aai Carry the Intelligent Key with you When closing the trunk lid 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens The Intelligent Key is inside the t
59. Phonebook A Fill 8 21 Back Downloaded Phonebook Select an entry from a list of phone numbers you have already transferred from your phone to your vehicle Outgoing Calls Store the name and phone number from the outgoing Call list Incoming Calls Store the name and phone number from the incoming call list To delete an item touch the Delete item key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 Yil 8 21 Back Redial r eo a Phonebook Call Logs Downloaded Phonebook Dial Keypad Please select an item MAKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the phone button on the steer ing wheel switches The phone screen will appear on the display 2 Touch the Phonebook key 3 Touch one of the downloaded person s key from the list Dialing will start 4 After the call is over perform one of the following to finish the call a Touch the Hang Up key b Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel switches There are different methods to make a call Select one of the following options instead of the Phonebook key in step 2 above Redial Dial the previously dialed number again Call Logs Outgoing Calls Select the name and phone number from the outgoing call logs Call Logs Incoming Calls Store the name and phone number from the ou
60. See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation in structions When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint See Child restraint installation using LATCH later in this section TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of atop tether strap it must be secured to the anchor point AWARNING Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re straints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0797 Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points 4 are located on the rear parcel shelf Installing top tether strap 1 27 First secure the child restraint with the LATCH System rear outboard seating positions only or the seat belt as applicable Flip up the anchor cover from
61. Soe cater ameces Getting Staned cocrscanccadgaaescagesene deans List of voice COMMANGS 64 6 isu sinew dent wemeesewad Speaker adaptation SA mode 0005 Troubleshooting guide 0eee eee eee Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped 05 4 61 Regulatory Information siceseaercndentaseeeoders 4 62 Voice Command S asasen tinae A a o 4 63 Pairing procedure 4224 gJaxencutteds dee veentedeke 4 63 Phone GOWNIOGO s2 lt n2c522n44csnceaceneeaecuues 4 64 WAKING a Calls a2vi2n20s2eniagieteadeseusseseea 4 66 Rocevng a Call sacectdotece yer sceeereccsceesce 4 66 DURING a Cal espressi tenniet 4 67 Phone SCUING serre iucteriande anioe rnaar 4 68 Nissan Voice Recognition System if so equipped 4 69 Using the system anan uaannn annann 4 69 System features ses eevee sad oud Meee we bees de 4 70 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System voice COMMAROS a2 asecceuvedeauenceesmuernsseeeaen us 4 71 Navigation system voice commands if so equipped cccd0esadtaas nema ee aabeas onus 4 72 Voice recognition settings 5 4 72 Troubleshooting guide s 4 cence tcccewecederees ad 4 73 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS if so equipped A WARNING Do not disassemble or modify this sys fire or electrical shock 1 tem If you do it may result in accidents Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or oT lack of sou
62. SyS EM whe sua ioi i See ee ai 4 46 4 61 Booster seatS oaoa aa 1 39 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 24 Brake tluid 22246 4448 44 24 weg 8 14 Brake light See stop light 8 28 Brake system ace a ew ka ede ws 5 23 Brake warning light 2 11 Brake wear indicators 2 16 8 21 Parking brake operation 5 18 Self adjusting brakes 8 21 Brakes cat bbeGiGeaaee eae os amp Ga 8 21 Break in schedule 5 20 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 32 Brightness contrast button 4 7 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement a s0 6 ee be we ws 8 28 C Capacities and recommended tuel lubricants c sossa a wok a 9 2 Car phone orCBradio 4 45 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 12 CD care and cleaning 4 43 CD changer See audio system 4 34 4 40 CD player See audio system 4 29 Child restraint with top tether strap 1 27 Child restraints 1 18 1 23 1 25 Precautions on child restraints 0 0 1 23 1 33 1 39 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 27 Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Chimes audible reminders 2 16 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 GIOCKs 4A 2 ake eave 4 5 4 28 4 32 4 38 models with navigation system 4 5 models without navigation s
63. The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg Technical and consumer information 9 19 You may add Class trailer hitch equipment that has a 2 000 Ib 909 kg maximum weight rating to the vehicle but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification Chart earlier in this section A CAUTION Do not use axle mounted hitches The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility o
64. This mode is only available when multiple CDs are loaded into the CD changer MP3 RDM RPT button When the RDM RPT button is pressed while an MP3 compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Random All Discs Random Disc Repeat Disc Random Folder Repeat Folder Repeat Track normal Random All Discs Random All Discs The loaded discs will be played randomly not in sequence of how they are loaded Random Disc The tracks on the current selected disc will be played randomly Repeat Disc The disc that is currently playing will be repeated Random Folder The folders on the current MP3 disc will be played randomly Repeat Folder The current folder being played will be repeated Repeat Track The current track will be repeated This mode is only available when multiple CDs are loaded into the CD changer Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 SCAN button 1 Disc All Tracks While listening to a CD press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track All Discs 1 Track While listening to a CD with other CDs loaded into the CD changer press and hold the SCAN button for approximately 2 seconds to preview the first 10 seconds of the first track on the CDs loaded Pressing the SCAN button again dur
65. Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica tor light may come on If engine related parts such as the muf fler are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated the VDC OFF indicator or SLIP indicator or both in dicator lights may illuminate When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con trol off indicator light may come on The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engin
66. When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli gent Key port to start the engine Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible For more details see Push button ig nition switch in the Starting and driving sec tion Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in t
67. and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Top tether strap child restraint in this section WRS0697 Front facing step 7 7 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the LATCH attachment path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 8 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 4 through 7 Rear facing Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using LATCH system LRS0824 if so equipped 1 Ifthe rear seat cushion has a flap Q pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors 2 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions Check to make sure the LA
68. announces the next set of available commands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 4 Say New phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel lular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system asks you to assign a priority level F The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more information on changing priorities The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone Follow the instruc tions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more infor
69. any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS OFF SWITCH if so equipped The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con trol System TCS on for most driving conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the TCS off To turn off the TCS push the TCS OFF switch The indicator will come on Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system See Traction Control System TCS if so equipped in the Starting and driving section VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH if so equipped The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The indicator will come on Push
70. any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will automatically turn off after 5 seconds 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To turn the screen on Press the SETUP button and then touch the display ON key or Press the D button The message Re suming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on the amber indicator will illuminate Settings gt Clock 8 21 a 12h gt Omin On screen Clock Clock Format Offset Adjust Daylight Saving Time ON i Clock settings Time Zone Clock Adjusting the time The following display will appear when pressing the SETUP button then touching the Clock key On screen Clock When this item is turned on a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system To turn off the clock in the upper right corner of the screen touch the On screen Clock ON key touch it again to display the clock Clock Format Touch the keyorthe P key to choose either the 12 hour clock display or the 24 hour clock display Offset Adjust Touch the key or the key to adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minut
71. as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in crease the likelihood of tire failure Se rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re sult in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be in dicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is
72. be added up to 15 If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles Technical and consumer information 9 3 If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers e
73. being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear NISSAN Intelligent Key 0 oe warning light The Intelligent Key warning light warns of a mal function with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off If the light comes on while the engine is stopped it may not be possible to free the steering lock or to start the engine If the light comes on while the engine is running you can drive the vehicle How ever in these cases contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section A Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened Instruments and controls 2 13 The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when th
74. belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled WRS0O762 WRS0763 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the child restraint press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat back while pulling up on the seat belt Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS AWARNING Infants and small children should al ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident The child could be crushed between the adult and part
75. belts and supplemental restraint system e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system Working with the seat belt retractor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts 1 57 When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow th
76. can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanuSsa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers 10 Index A Air bag See supplemental restraint SYSTEM As awe oo bd ee Oe a R 1 43 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbagsystem 005 1 52 Air bag warning light 1 58 2 14 Air cleaner housing filter 8 19 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation 4 13 Air conditioner service 4 20
77. cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen lt lt fe If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle Ct my Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action T t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswa
78. cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag 1 53 NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating ina crash instead of being OFF See Child re straints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object being detected by the occupant clas sification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly
79. cctutenewesace ate eeesees 1 19 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 19 Seat belt extenders 00 ccc cece eee 1 22 Seat belt maintenance 0 0 cee cece rnn 1 23 Child restants s srcsrre sisara bre harian ra ETEEN 1 23 Precautions on child restraints 55 1 23 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System 0000 cece eee nrnna 1 25 Top tether strap child restraint 1 27 Child restraint installation using LATCH 1 28 Child restraint installation using the seat ai EE E A E ature oeneeses 1 33 Booster Sedis aenecacedcmebonnewetur e iS 1 39 Precautions on booster seatS 0005 1 39 Booster seat installation 0000 e eee eee 1 41 Supplemental restraint system 0 0 c eee eee 1 43 Precautions on supplemental restraint SVS 6 20 64 eeui donee ot etekeeeendade genet ened 1 43 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 58 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 58 SEATS Sit upright and well back AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat
80. conditioner manual or automatic P 4 11 P 4 18 Shift selector P 5 11 Audio system controls if so equipped Storage if so equipped P 4 21 P 2 42 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 27 Vehicle information display controls P 2 17 Hood release P 3 23 METERS AND GAUGES 20 Traction Control System TCS OFF switch if so equipped P 5 25 Trunk opener P 3 23 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch if so equipped P 2 35 Intelligent Key port P 5 7 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Tachometer 7 Vehicle information display Speedometer 8 Instrument brightness control Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge Odometer twin trip odometer Twin trip odometer change button oo Se eS Instruments and controls 2 3 The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips 999 999 GEE E 33 E 2 gt I m A 1 Speedometer Changing the display 2 Change button Pushing the change button changes the display 3 Odometer twin trip odometer as follows SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Trip A Trip B Trip _A Speedometer Resetting the trip odometer The speedometer 1 indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h
81. could cause personal injury 1 59 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel v 22 ceeateciex ne ee ee aeedeketee ee 2 2 Meters and gauges 3 cg e ude rive seis yen ee aeenne ese 2 3 Speedometer and Odometer 00 cea ees 2 4 TACHOMGICl 2c cecane sce ded ogee sduewesenieuaed d 2 5 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuelgauge s2cpanenneeeeesequeney oeceadeeweess lt 2 6 Compass display if so equipped 000e eee 2 6 Compass display sses rocras xvreweewartuenankenees 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 10 Checking DUDS satis chal pakwaded ase aaeeawes 2 10 WV EA OES serge tee dees pee eee tie eee et a4 Indicator NOMS gece cteseen ie etene eee reece esse 2 14 Audible reminders j c0 eee banescu eee veeweseecwe 2 16 Vehicle information display 0 0eeeeeeeeeee 2 17 How to use the vehicle information display 2 17 Security SYSTEMS Ja ccs sscseeeedu ee eiwetes otewcees 2 25 Vehicle security system 2 002 00e 2 25 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 26 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 27 Switch operation 24456402246 404008500 eeueree nus 2 27 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped Cle OStel SWC seco ecieetaaenek ayaa EETA 2 28 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Xenon headlights if so equipped 5 2 29 Headlight control switch eee eens 2 29 Daytime r
82. covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli gent Key port to start the engine Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible For more details see Push button ig nition switch in the Starting and driving sec tion Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section Because the steering wheel is locked electrically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged Un locking the steering wheel is impossibl
83. fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior No matter what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be come excessively worn Floor mat positioning aid driver s side only This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve hicle model The driver s side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned Appearance and care 7 5 SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solut
84. has been detected Use the following reset procedure to return the moonroof operation to normal 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Push and hold the moonroof switch toward cL 2 Once the moonroof has reached the full tilt position release the switch Push and hold the switch toward the L gt 2 position again After a delay of four seconds the moonroof will make a small movement and backup 3 Release the switch 4 Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch push and continuously hold the switch toward L 2 The moonroof will move from the tilt position to the open position and back to the close position NOTE If the switch is released at any time during Step 4 the procedure must be restarted 5 Release the switch Do not place the ignition switch in the OFF position for at least 2 seconds The moonroof is now reset If the moonroof still does not operate properly have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN dealer Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Instruments and controls 2 47 Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to s
85. influence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could
86. level You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems ESettings Display Phone 8 21 Beck Clock Volume Tones Zi Navigation iM Voice Recognition Language Units To change the SSV mode from 0 to 5 press the SETUP button Then touch the Audio key the audio settings screen will be displayed Touch the or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by touching the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level touch the Back key repeatedly until the radio or the CD display reappears Clock set For setting the clock see Adjusting the time earlier in this section 5 Settings gt Audio 8 21 Balance Left Right Fade Rear Ii Front Speed Sensitive Vol 4 Please select an item CD display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be displayed when CD en co
87. line If fluid must be added fre quently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer For further brake and clutch fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recom mended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual WINDOW WASHER FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the window washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win dow washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for window washer solution This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the
88. located inside the console box The mat if so equipped may be removed for cleaning Instruments and controls 2 41 STORAGE BOX if so equipped Type A COVERED STORAGE BOX Push the center of the lid to open 2 42 Instruments and controls GROCERY HOOKS if so equipped The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic grocery bag A CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 20 Ibs 9 kg to a single grocery hook CARGO NET if so equipped To install the cargo net attach the net to the retainers WARNING To remove the cargo net detach the net from the Properly secure all cargo with ropes or Cargo net retainers straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision un secured cargo could cause personal injury The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion instruments and controls 2 43 WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows oper
89. lock knob 45 Locking with power door lock switch Automatic door lOCKS lt 4 cs ianrese es aeeseeicrwes Child safety rear door lock Sedan only NISSAN Intelligent Key With Door and Trunk Request Switches pp acxpai enwy creantenseevacr eens Operating range cn 00x sctenc x He wee sadadenacuess Door locks unlocks precaution 4 NISSAN Intelligent Key operation How to use the remote keyless entry MUNCUGCH ace su ne tanae crew uae hence er eeneaenes Warming signals cc secucentgsteneteceeeaeees set Troubleshooting guide 0 cece eee NISSAN Intelligent Key Without Door and Trunk Request OWICNES lt 10 6s ecss eee dna bea een dae eam Operating range 2 0 cs sacs eed en ee csewe wees How to use the remote keyless entry Us es ee ee ee eee ee eee 3 18 Waming SIGNS oedeeaed eats deteet see eee reer 3 21 Troubleshooting guide 6 on dees a see acde arenas 3 22 e a a tone cae toute PE A TE TE E ET 3 23 THUR NM o E ee oats E E E E sane eos 3 23 Opener operation n aessa gesiredencew ss 3 23 Interior trunk lid release 0 cece ee eee 3 24 Bie FillePdGOP 4 lt cnacntwcqecscceciceeecataser nt 3 25 Opener operation cece eee eee 3 25 Fueltiller Cap si sien otensweeereatuarwees erat kwa 3 25 Tilt telescopic steering column 3 27 Tilt ODCIaNONs sisese 23e24 nag eenedcedaetveses 3 27 Telescopic operation 1 0 0
90. mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 studded tires Skid and tra
91. near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle lf a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter
92. on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers choose Store The system confirms the name location and number then announces that the entry has been stored The system then ends the VR session Delete Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book all entries from the phone book the current redial number or the current call back number To delete entries from the phone book say a name or All entries when prompted by the sys tem The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion To delete the current redial number or call back number say redial number or call back num ber when prompted by the system If a redial number or a call back number exists the system deletes them without asking for confirma tion If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete the system says so and ends the VR session List names O Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR ses
93. or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident Follow all of the child restraint manu facturer s instructions for installation and use When purchasing a child re straint be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the child restraint is not anchored properly the risk of a child being in jured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re straints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses Adjustable seatbacks should be posi tioned to fit the child restraint but as upright as possible After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the re straint is not secure tighten the belt as necessary or put the restraint in an other seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restr
94. passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move In case of emergency 6 5 TURN by hand Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point Align the jack head between the two 6 6 Incase of emergency Raise the vehicle notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown The jack should be used on firm and level ground To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Re move the wheel nuts and then remove the tire Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2
95. pausing between words 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SYSTEM FEATURES NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol lowing systems Navigation if so equipped See the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for the available voice commands and opera tion Bluetooth Hands Free Phone For additional information on the navigation sys tem see the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Either zero or oh can be used for 9 Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following examples 1 800 662 6200 say Dial or Phone dial the system will respond with Please say the first group of numbers then say one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh or one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Note 1 For the best voice recognition phone dialing results say phone numbers as single dig its Note 2 You cannot say 555 6000 as five five five six thousand Personal vocabulary voicetags NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function called voicetags which can be associated with the phone and the navigation system if so equipped Using your own voice 70 voicetags c
96. pedal height does not return to normal BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 FUSES Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect t
97. placed in the ON position the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the CVT system is not functioning prop erly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Instruments and controls 2 11 c Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so LOJ Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare 2 12 instruments and controls The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being dri
98. range Is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver
99. s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready con dition drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you 9 26 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con ditions and obey all traffic laws 1 Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C Al low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H normal oper ating temperature 2 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds 3 Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 60 MPH 86 96 km h for at least 9 minutes 4 Stop the vehicle 5 Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH 55 km h and maintain the speed for 20 seconds 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times 7 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 k
100. s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 WT1I0096 QR25DE ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information VQ35DE WT1I0049 F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The F
101. severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor patter
102. spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it 6 8 Incase of emergency Vehicle Spawn started E Ey A WARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch Vehicle with battery for booster WCE0054 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector to N Neutral manual transmission or to P Park Continuously Variable Trans mission Switch off all unnecessary electri cal systems lights heater air conditioner etc 3 Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard 4 Connect jumper cables in the sequence il lustrated A 8 A CAUTION e Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that
103. sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO667 Front facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRSO668 Front facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRSO0681 Front facing step 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt WRS0698 Front facing step 7 If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See Top tether strap child restraint in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path The child restraint should not mo
104. the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section 6 2 Incase of emergency AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING
105. the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 35 POWER OUTLET LIC1070 Instrument panel Type A if so equipped The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones They are rated at 12 volt 120W 10A maximum The console outlet is powered directly by the vehi cle s battery 2 36 Instruments and controls LIC1071 Instrument panel Type B if so equipped A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allo
106. the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press
107. the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0594 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 3 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place 5 Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure If you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle A This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer SELF ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake
108. to adjust the angle The lumbar support feature provides lower back and height of the seat cushion support to the driver Push the switch Type A forward or backward or move the lever Type B up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle on the front passenger side Coupe Pull the seat recliner lever to the uppermost position folding the seatback forward 2 releas ing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked Operating tips The seatback and track will not lock until the seatback Is returned rearward The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point The seatback will return to the first locking notch when using the seat recliner lever Entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle on the driver s side using the upper seatback release lever Coupe The use of the upper seatback release lever on the inboard side of the passenger seat allows for the driver to allow passenger entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle access items located behind the front pas senger seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 Pull the upper seatback release lever Q to the u
109. to car keys EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the trunk lid closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart ment If you must drive with the trunk lid open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle
110. to remove the spare tire Remove In case of emergency Removing the bolt on wheel cover if so equipped A CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers Doing so could re sult in personal injury The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts The wheel cover will be removed along with the wheel when the nuts are removed To remove the wheel cover use the jack rod as illustrated Apply cloth between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface WCE0147 Jack up point coupe Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change a 2 WCE0160 Jack up point sedan Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials e Do not allow
111. to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger tem peratures can be set independently Press DUAL or turn the passenger temperature control dial to the left or right to activate dual climate control functions Turn the passen ger s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s tem perature Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the defroster control button to turn the system on The indicator light in the button will illuminate 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows turn the manual fan control to HI e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode When the control is activated the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the pass
112. tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Technical and consumer information 9 13 Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Weight z 6G oo 150 Ib x 2 300 Iib 30l1bx2 60lb 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 135 kg Luggage CT 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 14kg 27 kg Occupants Lk 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg Occupants Luggage LLERK CELLED 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 14 kg 70 kg Example 9 14 Technical and consumer information Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 472 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage l
113. up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them If a command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Repeat the command ina clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press the button on the steering wheel at any time Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep sounds to indi cate you have exited the system If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the amp F button on the steering wheel To speed the operation you can say multiple commands For example press the l button then say Phonebook New entry rather than Phonebook Wait for the voice feedback prompt then say New entry How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
114. vehicle at the same time The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection Once the selection is confirmed the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or you select a new phone Change priority Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone The priority level determines which phone is ac tive when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level 1 2 3 4 5 If the new priority level is already being used for another phone the two phones will swap priority levels For example if the current priority levels are Priority Level 1 Phone A Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone C Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1 then Priority Level 1 Phone C Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone A Delete phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone all phones or listen to the list again Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones the system a
115. you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance e Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated t
116. 1 27 9 Rear seat belts P 1 15 3 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag P 1 43 4 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 43 5 Head Restraints P 1 11 a ANN Ar aN 6 Front seat belts P 1 15 KNN 7 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 43 8 Seats P 1 2 9 Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor P 1 52 10 Seat belt with pretensioner P 1 57 11 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren P 1 25 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details oa 2 eee 0 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT Coupe Power windows P 2 44 Windshield P 8 20 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 27 Engine hood P 3 23 Tie down towing hooks if so equipped P 6 12 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 29 Replacing bulbs P 8 27 Tire pressure P 8 34 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 42 Mirrors P 3 28 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equipped keys P 3 4 3 2 3 2 Illustrated table of contents 0 3 0 4 Illustrated table of contents Sedan 9 10 11 12 13 Power windows P 2 44 Windshield P 8 20 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 27 Engine hood P 3 23 Tie down towing hooks if so equipped P 6 12 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 3
117. 3 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 29 Replacing bulbs P 8 27 Tire pressure P 8 34 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 42 Mirrors P 3 28 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equipped keys P 3 4 3 2 3 2 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details EXTERIOR REAR Coupe Rear window defroster switch P 2 28 Interior trunk lid release P 3 24 Trunk lid P 3 23 Vehicle loading P 9 12 Opener operation if so equipped P 3 23 Replacing bulbs P 8 27 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 25 P 9 3 8 Fuel filler door P 3 25 AP eN SS wo Illustrated table of contents 0 5 0 6 Illustrated table of contents Sedan a ce a wo Rear window defroster switch P 2 28 Interior trunk lid release P 3 24 Trunk lid P 3 23 Vehicle loading P 9 12 Opener operation if so equipped P 3 23 Replacing bulbs P 8 27 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 25 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 25 Child safety rear door lock P 3 6 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 9 10 11 Interior trunk access P 1 9 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 46 Sun visors P 3 27 Interior lights illuminated entry P 2 48 HomeLink if so equipped P 2 51 Automatic anti glare inside mirror if so equipped P 3 28 Glove box P 2 41 Front cup holders P 2 40 Front console P 2 41 Front seat P 1 2
118. 50 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels o
119. 53 Security indicator light 2 15 Spotlights See map light 2 50 Trank lights e se a e oh ee A a 2 50 Warning indicator lights and audible OMINdErS sis sa x eee a a a 2 10 Lights Map lig tS os amp get oF eae oe eG 2 50 Lock Child safety rear door lock 3 6 DOO TOOKS s ss Soe pang ee ee Se we 3 4 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 25 Glove box lock 2 41 Power door locks 3 5 10 4 Trunk lid lock opener lever Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Low washer fluid warning light Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 General maintenance Inside the vehicle Maintenance precautions Outside the vehicle Seat belt maintenance Under the hood and vehicle Malfunction indicator light Manual front seat adjustment Meters and gauges Instrument brightness control Automatic anti glare inside mirror Outside mirrors NISSAN Intelligent Key NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system NISSAN voice recognition system O Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 Odometer 64 0 s esa ae aaa a eee Bo 2 4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants a aaoo aaa 9 2 Changing engine oil 8 10 Changing engine oilfilter 8 12 Checking engine oil level 8 9 Engine Qil scos eaa ka a eh a 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil viscosity a 24 a 4 eas 9 5 Outs
120. AYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the 2 position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 2 32 Instruments and controls AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO Pa or Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright ness of the instrument panel lights when driving at night wi D position TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Q Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane chang
121. D after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The recom mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section Spare tire size if so equipped Checking tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap 7 Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres sure Front Original Tire P215 60 R16 220 kPa 32 PSI P21 a a 7 230 kPa 33 PSI P235 45R18 sd 8 Rear Original Tire P215 60R16 220 kPa 32 PSI P215 55R17 230 kPa
122. Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS or Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light BRAKE or Brake warning light Charge warning light AT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT CHECK check warning light if so equipped Engine oil pressure warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on BRAKE or os SERVICE FA 2 10 instruments and controls KEY 0 NISSAN Intelligent Key warning light Seat belt warning light and chime oa e PY Supplemental air bag warning light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT po sition indicator light if so equipped Soe Front passenger air bag status light 2 Ee High beam indicator light Blue SERVICE ENGINE SOON Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The following lights come on briefly and then go off VDC AT SLIP CHECK ABS o amp R Securi
123. Do not spin the tires above 35 mph 55 km h If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle In case of emergency 6 13 MEMO 6 14 Incase of emergency 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior lt sicccssxasecees eo anaana aana 7 2 Air fresheners 2 22 0cexrs4 Soe vaeedentereesceduuss 7 5 Washing 2202 es lt 4 os end aes eden Annne E 7 2 oe E E E E E E E 7 5 VWs PE TEE EEROR ARER TAERE a Dear bel usate ca hededes shade aecneepeeaesesenc 7 6 REMOVING SPOlS aceeesaieeumorueteenegedd ea peas 7 3 Corrosion DIOlECtiON occc vce wee tnwnaiercvaaewcnadar 7 6 WHOCIDOUY ant E A TE E T TTE 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle Ce E E E E 7 3 COMOSION oe wcaucadcdudswraweee Scene euwens eaeawe 7 6 Aluminum alloy WHSCISisocueewnctsree ct rsecttianas 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of FOMe PANS sc 2gecenccnene arta E a ea 7 4 COHOSION pone cemecene weese nr EN E 7 6 Tire dressings Aiceceee ce segecteveteesandecese ae 7 4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 Cleaning interior scnennsxnennee eeaeeuwae da teuredes 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such a
124. EATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic if so equipped ZA PIO oe SY a Driver temperature control dial Air flow control buttons Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Rear defrost button Front window defrost button Fan speed dial system OFF button Air recirculation button A C ON OFF button AUTO button A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on 2 Turn the driver s side temperature control dial to the left or right
125. IL FILTER A CAUTION 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply Be careful not to burn yourself The engine the parking brake oil may be hot 2 Turn the engine off 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with 3 Place a large drain pan under the oil filter a clean rag 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then A CAUTION remove the oil filter by turning it by hand Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to engine damage 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID A CAUTION e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 V Do not mix with other fluids Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 V will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty When checking or replacement of CVT Fluid is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing POWER STEERING FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fil
126. MENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving front wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated In case of emergency 6 11 A CAUTION e When towing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT or manual trans e Never tow Continuously Variable Trans mission models with the rear wheels on mission CVT models with the front the ground if you do not use towing wheels on the ground or four wheels on ace the ground forward or backward as anaes Always release the parking this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is nec essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels When towing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models with the front wheels on towing dollies or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck Turn the ignition switch to the OFF vehicle position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position Pulling a stuck vehicle with a rope or similar device Never Do not use the hook if so equipped to tow the secure the steering wheel by turning vehicle the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion This may damage the steering lock mechanism Move the shift selector to the N Neu tral position 6 12 Incase of emergency AWARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle Do not
127. N icon is flashed during scan mode The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all tracks on the disc or if the SCAN button is pressed during scan mode CD EJECT When the amp button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off CD IN indicator A CD icon indicator appears on the display when a CD is loaded with the system on AUX Auxiliary button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas sette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop com puters Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 9 RDM RPT button 10 PWR VOL control knob 11 AUX button 12 RADIO button CD button 14 DISP button 15 PRESET A B C button 16 Station and CD select 1 6 buttons 17 _ CD load button No satellite radio reception is available unless there Is an active XM satellite radio service subscription Satellite ra PRESET 4 dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii 16 134 ABC and Guam If satellite radio is not opera RDM AUXIN tional then pressing the RADIO button oe ee Be ppt SCAN To ooo 8 will switch between FM an
128. NING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk To open the trunk from the inside pull the illumi nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light The handle is located inside the trunk compart ment on the interior of the trunk lid FUEL FILLER DOOR LPD0397 OPENER OPERATION The fuel filler door release is located on the floor to the left of the driver s seat To open the fuel filler door pull up the release To lock close the fuel filler door securely LPD0448 Coupe FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove To tighten turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard For the Coupe model put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling For the Sedan model loop the tether strap around the hook 4 while refueling Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 LPD0449 Sedan WARNING Gasoline i
129. ONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine 4 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Bluetooth Q microphone location Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular pho
130. OR LIGHTS Indicator Name light Anti lock Braking Master warning light 2 13 Malfunction Indica System ABS warn SOON tor Light MIL ing light NISSAN Intelligent 2 13 Security indicator Key warning light light Seat belt warning 2 13 Slip indicator light if light and chime so equipped Supplemental air 1 58 Traction Control bag warning light System off indicator light if so equipped i Turn signal hazard 2 16 Continuously Vari indicator lights able Transmission Continuously Vari CVT check warn able Transmission Vehicle Dynamic ing light if so CVT position indi Control off indicator equipped cator light if so light if so equipped equipped Engine oil pressure 2 12 warning light Front passenger air bag status light Low tire pressure 2 12 warning light High beam indicator light blue 0 12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system GOS EE ETE E TEA E E EEE 1 2 Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 Front power seat adjustment if so equipped for driver s seat 0005 1 4 Folding rear seat asccatenncadsackeceeed oaeantn lt 1 9 Head restraints occiuwed cues ct diawes scene ciwes 1 11 DECOM 25 sceousetees E elute ence tarees 1 15 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 15 Child Sale 25 swan ri rner enemas e trees 1 18 Pregnant WOMEN ccscesasnduwensetawensgaaenne 1 19 Inj red DElISONS ause bes
131. RNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself A CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50 anti freeze and 50 demineralized or distilled water The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors such as or ange may damage the engine cooling system Demineral ized or dis tilled water Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Outside temperature down to Coolant or equivalent CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level A If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level If the cooling system freque
132. S To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected The shift selector is not in the P Park Shift the shift selector to the P Park position position The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine When opening the driver s door to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously The NO KEY warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle The NO KEY warning appears on the dis play and the outside chime sounds continuously The shift
133. S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not load your ve hicle beyond this capacity Over loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operat ing conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading beyond the specified ca pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components e Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pre
134. SSAN dealer check the trans mission as soon as possible AWARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode If the fluid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated The MIL may come on to indicate the fail safe mode is activated see Malfunction indicator light MIL in the Instrument and controls sec tion This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition swi
135. Say pound for Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session You can also issue the Transfer Call com mand again to return to a hands free call through the vehicle Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phone book NOTE Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phone Book New Entry Edit Delete List Names The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system Each name can have up to 4 locations phone numbers associ ated with it NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B New entry Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name y
136. See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 9 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS r 7 Dr tl i p i1 Jl i mn A 0 10 Illustrated table of contents Re fis QR25DE engine Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 13 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model P 8 14 8 14 Air cleaner P 8 19 Fuse block P 8 22 Battery P 8 15 Fuse fusible link box P 8 22 Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 Radiator cap P 8 8 Drive belt location P 8 17 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 8 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 15 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details VQ35DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 13 2 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 3 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model P 8 14 8 14 4 Air cleaner P 8 19 5 Fuse block P 8 22 6 Battery P 8 15 7 8 SS yo Fuse fusible link box P 8 22 iene es Camm use fusible link box Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 9 Radiator cap P 8 8 Sin niem 10 Drive belt location P 8 17 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 8 TF 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir vy P 8 15 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents O 11 WARNING INDICAT
137. T A PRESET B PRESET C CD AUX PRESET A This mode is only available when a CD is loaded This mode is only available when a compatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack While in one of the preset radio station banks A B or C use the tuning switch Y or A to select one of the preset radio stations 1 6 Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume A Tuning Memory change radio While in one of the preset radio station banks A B or C push the tuning switch Y or for less than 1 5 seconds to change to the next preset station in memory Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch Y or amp for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station Next Previous track CD Push the tuning switch Y or 4 for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks Change disc CD if so equipped Push the tuning switch Y or amp for more than 1 5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window A CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor recep tion or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratc
138. TCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors WRS0801 WRS0802 Rear facing web mounted step 3 Rear facing rigid mounted step 3 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 LRS0673 Rear facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0674 Rear facing step 5 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the LATCH attachment path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 6 Check to make sure the ch
139. TENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and che
140. Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag Is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working p
141. adequate number of phrases have been recorded The system will ask you to say your name Follow the instructions to register your name The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has been completed and the sys tem is ready The SA mode will stop if The buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phone book new entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number setup pair phone memo pad play eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phone book delete entry memo pad record dial star two one seven oh Yes No select ring tone dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on setup change priority call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one Home four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phone book list names call eight oh five four one Correction setup change ring tone dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu Delete dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six f
142. again to exit the clock set mode The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display DISP display button Pressing the DISP display button will show text information about CD MP3 and SAT satellite if so equipped in the audio display If the text information is to long to fully be dis played on the screen press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1 5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Track number and Track time gt Album title lt Song title Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc Track time displays the amount of time the track has played Album title displays the title of the CD being played Song title displays the title of the selected CD track MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to a CD with MP8s and ID3 tags press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows Track number and Track time Folder title Album title Artist name lt Song title Track time displays the amount of time the current track has been playing Track number displays the number of the track playing on the selected disc F
143. ailable tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION UNIT Ib kg MAXIMUM TOWING MAXIMUM TONGUE TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or prop erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount
144. aints fit in all types of vehicles When your child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident A CAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil dren system Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used See Child restraint installation using the seat belts later in this section In general child restraints are also designed to be installed with a lap shoulder seat belt Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes When selecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat
145. airs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING Rolling code garage door openers or other roll ing code devices which are code protected and manufactured after 1996 may be deter mined by the following Reference the garage door opener Owner s Manual for verification The hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door Press and hold the trained HomeLink but ton If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly then remain on after 2 sec onds To program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink the aid of a sec ond person may make the following procedures quicker and easier 1 Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand If there is difficulty locating the training button reference the garage door opener Owner s Manual 2 Press the training button on the garage door
146. ait Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 Giving voice commands 1 2 Press the button The system announces Please say a com mand After the tone sounds and the face icon of the display changes speak a command For additional information see List of voice commands later in this section Voice and message feedback will be pro vided when the command is accepted If the command is not recognized the sys tem announces Please say again Repeat the command in a clear voice f you want to cancel the command press the D button or press and hold the v amp button for 2 seconds during feed back The system will announce Voice in put is canceled lf you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control buttons or on the steering wheel while being provided with the feedback Operating tips To get the best performance out of NISSAN Voice Recognition observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor rectly Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 3 5 sec onds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without
147. al restraint system LRSO824 if so equipped 1 Ifthe rear seat cushion has a flap Q pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors 2 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions WRS0O799 Front facing web mounted step 3 3 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors 4 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraints earlier in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head re straint when the child restraint is removed WRS0800 Front facing rigid mounted step 3 If the seating position does not have an adjust able head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating posi tion or a different child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 LRSO671 Front facing step 5 5 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
148. amaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regul
149. an be registered in the Phonebook phone and 20 locations can be registered in the Ad dress Book navigation system For additional information see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System earlier in this section and or the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual if so equipped for the method of voic etag registration BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS Depending on the commands some different phrases are available Optional words are shown in brackets A few words identified with a slash indicate the alternate words that you can select when speaking the command Data items that you need to enter such as phone numbers are indicated in italics with brackets lt gt How to say commands Example PHONE DIAL CALL lt phone num ber digits gt stands for the following possible commands DIAL lt 7 to 32 phone number digits gt CALL lt 7 to 32 phone number digits gt PHONE DIAL lt 7 to 32 phone number digits gt Help commands e COMMAND LIST HELP Gives spoken information about NISSAN Voice Recognition and displays the list of help commands VOICE HELP or Phone commands e PHONE DIAL lt phone number digits gt or CALL lt phone number digits gt Dials the phone number given in the com mand Speak the phone number in one se quence The number is automatically dialed e PHONE REDIAL Redials the phone number l
150. and or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section D Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator light if so equipped When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator light shows the shift selec tor position See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual Front passenger air bag status af light The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual ED High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated Malfunction Indicator Light MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction The Malfunction Indicator Light may a
151. and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 Technical and consumer information 9 27 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts 9 28 Technical and consumer information nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts
152. and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Aff
153. and seat belt system lf the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on front facing child re straints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0O795 LATCH system anchor locations LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi tions only Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors 1 25 WRSO0796 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor point locations The LATCH a
154. ang up Finish the call Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person Enter Digit Brings up a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is touched Mute will be cancelled To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETUP mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 E Settings gt Phone 8 21 Back Phonebook Downloaded Phonebook Delete Call Logs Phone Ringer vo MUMU Phone Incoming Vol M a PHONE SETTING To set up the hands free phone system to your preferred settings press the SETUP button then touch the Phone key on the display Phonebook See Phonebook download earlier in this sec tion Downloaded Phonebook See the following information for each item E Settings gt Phone 8 21 Delete Call Logs f Phone Ringer vo MMMM Phone Incoming Vol Use Vehicle Ringtone Bluetooth Setup i Please select an item Download All Transfer phonebook entries from your cellu lar phone to the vehicle s phonebook For more information see Phonebook down load earlie
155. arly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS When cleaning the rear window it may be easier to clean if the high mounted stop light is removed first Be careful when removing the high mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high mounted stop light wires To remove the high mounted stop light Push toward rear of vehicle 2 Lift to remove The high mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels Do no
156. as sette tape CD player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the CD AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX Jack A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated LHAO752 CD CARE AND CLEANING Type A 1 Source select and Power on switch Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the 2 Tuning switch disc Never touch the surface of the disc a Voelumeiconticl swich e Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 1 2 3 Type B Source select and Power on switch Tuning switch Volume control switch LHA0754 Type C 1 Source select and Power on switch 2 Tuning switch 3 Volume control switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL if so equipped POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio system on 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SOURCE select switch Push the SOURCE select switch to change the mode in the following sequence PRESE
157. as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pre
158. ase contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when
159. ash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Press the f button on the Intelligent Key 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the M button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the M button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows if so equipped The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the M button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key 3 14 Pre driving ch
160. ast dialed OUTGOING CALLS Shows the outgoing call history 1 to 5 INCOMING CALLS Shows the incoming call history 1 to 5 PHONE SELECT lt phone priority number 1 to 5 gt or SELECT CHOOSE PHONE lt phone priority number 1 to 5 gt If multiple phones are registered to the sys tem you can change which phone to con nect to the system as long as that phone is present in the vehicle e PHONEBOOK Shows the first page of the phone book list Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 e PHONEBOOK lt voicetag gt Shows the specified voicetag entry in the phone book and dials the phone number registered in the specified voicetag after pressing the ENTER button on the steering wheel e PHONEBOOK PLAY DIRECTORY or PLAY PHONEBOOK DIRECTORY Dials the phone number registered in the phone book NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS if so equipped For additional information see the separate Navi gation System Owners Manual for the voice commands available and operations ESettings 8 21 VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS Press the SETUP button then touch the Voice Recognition key 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems E Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 21 Voice Feedback 0 on i Please select an item Voice Feedback When this item is enabled indicator is
161. ate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the drivers or passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled 2 44 Instruments and controls Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side automatic switch if so equipped Right rear passenger side sedan only Left rear passenger side sedan only Driver side automatic switch Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows To open a window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the de sired window position is reached To close a window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached 1 To close the window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached 2 Jt A Rear power window switch sedan only The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the sw
162. ater in this section Instruments and controls 2 21 WARNING BOOR WARNING CRUISE SET 1 9 OPEN WARNING RELEASE SY A PARKING i 10 BRAKE BRAKE Q 11 0 RANGE 000 at clutch WARNING nfo waste Ot Vehicle information display warnings 4 Low windshield washer fluid warning 8 Cruise main switch indicator and indicators 5 No key warning 9 Cruise set switch indicator 1 Door and trunk open warning 6 Parking brake warning 10 Engine start operation indicator CVT mod 2 Push warning CVT models 7 Shift P warning CVT models als 3 Low fuel warning 2 22 instruments and controls 11 Engine start operation indicator MT mod els 12 NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indicator 13 NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indicator 14 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator 15 Steering lock release malfunction indicator Door and trunk open warning This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk has been opened when the engine is running Push warning CVT models After the Shift P warning illuminates the Push warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift selec tor is moved to the P Park position See Shift P warning CVT models in this sec tion for additional information To turn off the Push warning place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position Low fuel warning This war
163. ates when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec tor in any position except in the P Park position If this warning illuminates the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Move the shift selec tor to the P Park position or place the ignition switch in the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound If the shift selector is moved to the P Park position the Push warning will appear Refer to Push warning CVT models in this section For additional information about Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Cruise main switch indicator This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the Instruments and controls 2 23 cruise main switch indicator illuminates the cruise control system is operational Cruise set switch indicator This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the indicator blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not function ing properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Engine start operation indicator CVT mod els This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF ACC or ON position with the shift selector in the P Park position This indicator mea
164. ations can be set for the FM AM or SAT Satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Press the A B C button or the Preset key to select preset channel A B or C 2 Press the RADIO button to select the de sired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual tuning seek tuning or scan tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory 1 6 buttons until a beep sound is heard the station will now appear in one of the 1 6 keys on the screen 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Memorizing is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse blows the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition syst
165. autions vrs cers ces cee secede ee 5 23 Anti lock Braking System ABS 05 5 24 Traction Control System TCS if so equipped 5 25 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system if so equipped neeecguseacanse seecseemneencanetes 5 26 Cold weather Griving i vss s s0ce teaveavdeedianeeden 5 27 Freeing a frozen door lock 20 5 5 27 Antifreeze coctuecneded eeheestdacdsetadecesd 5 27 Sc ee ee ne eS ee 5 27 Draining of coolant Waler csccu voernevesvemes 5 28 Tire equipment poc2eceoe lt unserer tuseeesatevex se 5 28 Special winter equipment 2 022 00 5 28 Driving ON SNOW OF 106 ge ses ve cneencdcaeweseped 5 28 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 29 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access
166. battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid Never leave the engine or the CVT re lated component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servi
167. ble eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling e Keep battery out of the reach of i WDI0224 children 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer DRIVE BELT WDI0673 QR25DE engine Power steering fluid pump Water pump Generator Air conditioner Crank pulley Automatic belt tensioner AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly oo Sa 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear Cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer 2 Have the belt checked regularly for condi
168. c cece eee eee 3 27 SUN VISOS e eoem EEEn EEEE r RERA aent 3 27 Vanity MITOS srs nepa tsei t eiee uU EREA sur 3 28 AEn E EE E E E E P TE ATE EET 3 28 Rearview mirror if so equipped 600s 3 28 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped scant ccereteavesnaaeenreenstont 3 29 Outside Mirrors 2a anbaiweatiivaons degecheaw eure 3 29 KEYS 1 Two Intelligent Keys 2 Mechanical keys inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Key which are registered to your vehicle s Intelli gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System components 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments Never leave these keys in the vehicle As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis tered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when register ing new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it ina safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep tra
169. ched while a com pact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM MP3 CD ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM 1 FOLDER RDM ALL DISC RDM Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM Tracks from the disc that is cur rently playing will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RDM Folders from that disc that is currently playing will be played randomly CD EJECT Current Selected disc Press the amp button The loaded com pact disc will be ejected Also if the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the next compact disc will be loaded If no disc is loaded the system will stay on the com pact disc screen CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD AUX Auxiliary button The AUX jack is located above the CD changer The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable c
170. cing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS r 7 Dr tl i p i1 Jl i mn A 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself JESN QR25DE engine 12 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model Air cleaner Fuse block Battery Fuse Fusible link box Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap Drive belt location Engine coolant reservoir Windshield washer fluid reservoir VQ35DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model 4 Air cleaner 5 Fuse block 6 Battery 7 Fuse Fusible link box iene GES i 8 5 Engine oil dipstick 9 Radiator cap TA niem 10 Drive belt location 11 Engine coolant reservoir Yi TF 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary AWA
171. ck of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it A CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors trunk lid glove box and rear seatback lock See Doors and Trunk lid later in this section Storage in the Instruments and controls sec tion and Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key insta
172. ck for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle
173. cle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wir ing harnesses should not be modified or disconnected Unauthorized electri cal test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer Safety Seats seat
174. cle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube then tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate If the ENGINE light illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The ENGINE light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section earlier in this manual TILT TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN TILT OPERATION Pull the lever f all the way toward you and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident TELESCOPIC OPERATION Pull the lever 4 all the way toward you and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction to the desired position Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position AWARNING Do not adjust the steering whe
175. com mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs drums Such inter ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer
176. ction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Only certain SAE class S tire chains can be used on this vehicle Using the wrong Class S chains on this vehicle will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should use a tire chain that meets the minimum clearances for your vehicle 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use a tire chain that is designed to provide the specified space between the installed tire chain and where the tire meets the rim as shown on the chart 7 in 47 vm 2 amm in en A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the necessary clearance be tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action dam age to the fenders or underbody If possible a
177. d The console light brightness can be adjusted with the instrument brightness control Instruments and controls 2 49 MAP LIGHTS ON DOOR OFF O00 000 LIC1080 Front map lights To turn the map lights on press the light lens To turn them off press the lens again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery 2 50 instruments and controls LIC1083 Rear map lights sedan only To turn the rear map lights on press the switch To turn them off press the switch again TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed the light goes off The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position For bulb replacement procedures refer to Exte rior and interior lights in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required
178. d AM bands _ e S FM AM SAT RADIO WITH i COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER if LHao729 equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera 1 SEEK TRACK button 5 AUDIO button BASS TREBLE FADE t on precautions earlier in this section 2 CD insert slot SSV BALANCE and BEEPS No satellite radio reception is available unless 3 TUNE FF REW button 6 CLOCK button there is an active XM satellite radio service 4 CD eject button 7 AUXIN jack subscription Satellite radio is not available in 8 SCAN button Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands Audio main operation PWR VOL control knob Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and then press the PWR VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the PWR VOL con trol knob Turn the PWR VOL control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes AUDIO button Bass Treble Fade SSV Balance and Beeps Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Spd Sen Vol Bal ance Beep ON OFF Audio Bass To adjus
179. d an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Technical and consumer information 9 21 e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector lever to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the tran
180. d beside the license plate light When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock A CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line are displayed on the monitor 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems They are indicated as reference distances to objects The lines and colors in the display indi cate distances from the back bumper line in the illustration 1 5 ft 0 5 m red 2 3ft 1 m yellow 3 7 ft 2m green 4 10 ft 3 m green The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance E Settings gt Display 8 21 Back Brightness ADJUSTING THE SCREEN To adjust the quality of the screen press the SETUP button To adjust the Brightness Tint Contrast Dis play ON OFF and Color of the RearView Monitor press the SETUP button with the RearView Monitor on then touch the or key on the item and adju
181. d height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Larger children Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 86 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt in the child s seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle por tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Fed eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder bel
182. d tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK IN SCHEDULE information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Follow these recommendations for the future re liability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing May 2009 10 Publication No OM9E OL32U2 Printed in U S A
183. ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one mi
184. ded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be displayed during CD playback Disc number displays which disc is playing Folder number displays the folder number on the CD that is being played Track number displays the number of the track that is being played Track time displays the amount of time the current track has been playing Title displays the name of the song playing Artist displays the name of the artist Album displays the name of the album Satellite radio display Some satellite stations might broadcast informa tion that shows up in the display Depending on what the station decides to broad cast the following text might be displayed Channel number displays the channel num ber of the selected satellite radio station Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station Channel name displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station Artist name displays the name of the artist host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station Song title displays the song title show name or temperature of the selected satel lite radio station FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows AM lt gt FM SAT When the RADIO button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position
185. den steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped AWARNING e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury Engine block heaters are available through NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater 1 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet
186. der 1 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Idle speed M T CVT in N position No adjustment is necessary Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle Spark plug DILKAR6A 11 FXE22HR 11 Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 0 043 1 1 Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES Wheel type Size Offset in mm Aluminum Steel 16 x 7JJ 1 77 45 Aluminum 17x 7 1 2JJ 1 77 45 Aluminum 18 7 5 1 77 45 T type Spare 16 x 4T 1 77 45 Tire size P215 60R16 P215 55R17 P235 45R18 Spare tire T135 70R16 T135 90R16 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Coupe Sedan Overall length in mm 182 5 4 636 189 8 4 820 Overall width in mm 70 7 1 795 70 7 1 795 Overall height in mm 55 3 1 405 57 9 1 471 Front track in mm 61 0 1 549 61 0 1 549 Rear track in mm 60 8 1 544 61 0 1 549 Wheelbase in mm 105 3 2 675 109 3 2 776 Gross vehicle weight rating Ib kg Gross axle weight rating See the F M V S S C M V S S certification label on the center pillar between the driver s side front Front Ib kg and rear doors Rear Ib kg 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle
187. dex num ber Research octane number 91 For 3 5L engine NISSAN recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regu lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels an
188. drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care secti
189. driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips SERVICE the ENGINE light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Mal FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light MIL later in this section The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty 2 6 Instruments and controls COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the direction of the vehicle s heading With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Push and hold Feature the N Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings 9 seconds Compass enters calibrati
190. drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt Starting and driving 5 5 OFF ROAD RECOVERY While driving the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface If this occurs maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicl
191. dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and the oil NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equiva lents 9 6 Technical and consumer information A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE QR25DE VQ35DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4 cylinder in line 6 cylinder V block Slanted at 60 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 5 x 3 9 89 0 x 100 0 3 760 x 3 205 95 5 x 81 4 Displacement cu in cm 151 82 2 488 213 45 3 498 Firing or
192. e Daylight Saving Time When this item is turned on the daylight saving time application is enabled To turn off daylight saving time touch the Daylight Saving Time ON key touch it again to enable daylight saving Settings gt Time Zone 8 21 Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic O on i Manually set the time zone Time Zone Touch the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location Touch the ON key for the particular time zone Pacific zone Mountain zone Central zone Eastern zone Atlantic zone Newfoundland zone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 After selection touch the Back key the Clock screen will appear Pacific zone has been set as the initial default setting Settings gt Volume Tones 8 21 Guidance Volume MMU Guidance Voice Phone Ringer vot MMMM Phone Incoming Vol _ I Button Beeps i Please select an item Beep setting Touch the Volumes Tones key Touch the But ton Beeps ON key to turn on or turn off the beep sound To accept the changes touch the Back key With this option on a beep will sound if any button is pressed or any key is touched The amber indicator will be illuminated 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 21 Settings gt
193. e Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed Only touch the base when handling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and or headlight performance High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped e Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FRONT PARK TURN SIDEMARKER LIGHT Bulb replacement requires the removal of the headlight assembly If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly Low Halogen H11 Low Xenon D2R High H9 Park 168 Turn 3457NAK Sidemarker Sedan 168 Coupe W5W Front fog light if so equipped H11 Step light 194 Rear combination light Tail Stop 3157K Turn 3156 Backup reversing Sedan 921 Coupe 912 License plate light W5W High mounted stop light Inside coupe LED Inside sedan 921 Spoiler if so equipped LED Front map light B5 Rear map light B5 Trunk light 158 Vanity mirror light HTU
194. e lockout protection gent Key with you handle request switch while any door is ee HIP ed WIN tG MENMEN hey 2 Close all doors open However doors lock with the me When the driver s side door is open the doors chanical key even if any door is open are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put 3 Push any door handle request switch inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed while carrying the Intelligent Key with you Doors do not lock with the door handle YING g y y request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the lock will automatically unlock and the door 4 All doors and the trunk will lock the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you PU2zer sounds However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the Intelligent Key in a purse pocket or your other hand A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in
195. e Coolant or equivalent 50 Demineralized or distilled water Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid MTF HQ Multi 75W 85 or API GL 4 Viscosity SAE 75W 85 Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 2 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 3 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 4 or equivalent DOT 3 NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base HFC 134a R 134a 5 NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze fluid or equivalent FUEL RECOMMENDATION For 2 5L engine Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 For 3 5L engine NISSAN recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is no
196. e cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual Starting and driving 5 27 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfac
197. e engine not running the ignition should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM
198. e even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent Key port Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer 3 8 Pre driving ch
199. e front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage gt Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and preten sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all 2 14 Instruments and controls Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioners may not function properly For addi tional details see Supplemental restraint sys tem in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems if so equipped
200. e guided automatically into the slot and start playing To insert the disc first press the button If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the PWR button will start the compact disc Do not use 3 1 in 8 cm diameter compact discs in the CD changer CD load button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the load button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the load button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer CD button When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play A h A TUNE FF REW fast tor ward rewind button When the TUNE FF REW amp or Y button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD returns to normal play speed A v MP3 TUNE FF REW button While p
201. e if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in cer tain side collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing con dition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat ing positions They can help save lives and re duce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system practical from the door finishers and side roof
202. e oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty WDI0492 QR25DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug WDI0493 VQ35DE 5 Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oll If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter later in this section e Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used
203. e road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Cc iP o 6 KR ZN KAA Xo Tongue load x 100 10 to 15 Total trailer load Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load be comes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Gross axle weight T11012M Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW Maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Technical and consumer information 9 17 Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achiev
204. e seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light AF will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in the ON or START position In this case the preten sioner system may not function properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels located on the sun visors 2 SRS Air Bag Warning Label located on the door pillar SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air light displaying A in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monito
205. e signal 2 To signala lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position if so equipped the head lights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the D position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on Instruments and controls 2 33 The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving
206. e the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load use the following procedure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue load 9 18 Technical and consumer information To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Fron
207. e the shift selector to the P Park posi play and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector is not in the P Park tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously position OFF position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock trunk i i i OES the Intelligent K ith you When closing the trunk lid eee nes a Pay The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk sary the Inteligent Key witi you 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments HOOD Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver s side instrument panel the hood springs up slightly Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood Remove the support rod from the clamp Insert the support rod into the hole on the passenger s side of the hood When closing the hood return the hood rod to its original position Lower the hood ap proximately 12 inches 30 cm above the latch and release it This allows proper en gagement of the hood latch e Make sure the hood AWARNING is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming f
208. e to stay in the ap propriate driving lane 5 6 Starting and driving lf you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire e Do not rapidly apply the brak
209. ecks and adjustments Releasing the trunk lid Press the hami button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position See Cancel switch later in this section Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 201 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when lt has run for 25 seconds or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key To deactivate Press and hold the and ir buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and A buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNAL
210. ecks and adjustments WPD0465 Coupe shown Sedan similar OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 1 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key system s operat ing range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Ae U Do not pull the door handle before pushing Raikes the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to i open the door aaea F WPD0432 DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS Coupe shown Sedan similar PRECAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door Yo
211. ederal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully t e WTI0173 WTI0178 EMISSION CONTROL TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION INFORMATION LABEL LABEL LABEL The emission control information label is at The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to tached to the underside of the hood as shown Loading Information label The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION Use the following steps to mount the front license mare AWARNING M Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher e It is extremely dangerous to ride 9 12 Technical and consumer information at the location mark small dimple using a 0 31 in 8 mm drill To avoid damaging the threads behind the finisher apply only light pressure to the drill Mount the license plate bracket using two 8 mm slotted hex head screws in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not all
212. edical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key transmits weak radio waves Environ mental conditions may interfere with the opera tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
213. ee if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle 3 Close all doors hood and trunk Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key door handle request switch power door lock switch or mechanical key 4 Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security sys tem is now pre armed After about 30 sec onds the vehicle security system automati cally shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob or the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the sys tem will not arm Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all the doors hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the system will be released Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactiva
214. eeaerere 2 44 CUSTOMS ereer Ee HEER EEEE T E E 2 52 Power WINdOWS ccc eee eee eee ees 2 44 Operating the HomeLink universal Moonroof if so equipped 00 eee eee eee 2 46 WANSCEIVE nannan nannu 6548 denn rnrn rnnr 2 53 Automatic MOOnroof seses saaaaa aeea aaaa 2 46 Programming trouble diagnosis 2 53 aiae Al ea e E E E ous 2 48 Clearing the programmed information 2 53 Console light if so equipped n nananana 2 49 Rolling code programming sssssses saanane 2 53 Wal ON rerea E E E EEE 2 50 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 54 THOR MGI a5 sus E ET E EE 2 50 If your vehicle is stolen eee eee eens 2 54 INSTRUMENT PANEL La 1 Vents P 4 10 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn if so equipped Bluetooth hands free signal switch P 2 29 phone system if so equipped P 4 44 P 4 46 P 4 61 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 2 2 Instruments and controls Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 43 P 2 34 Cruise control main set switch P 5 19 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 27 Ignition switch P 5 7 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 33 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 53 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 43 Glove box P 2 41 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 Heater and air
215. eeee 8 21 FUGO scope eur E E A O E Meer eaten cea hates 8 22 Engine compartment 20 20e eee 8 22 Passenger compartment 00 eee ee eee 8 24 Battery replacement 0 00 e eee eee eee 8 25 NISSAN Intelligent Key 22 00005 8 26 Eaa e cae eae pass faeces Soe ee eee eee eee ealees 8 27 PICHONGM Sc uececsernneseetacee ead cena aerated 8 27 Front park turn sidemarker light 8 27 Exterior and interior lights 8 28 Wheels and tires 200200 cee eee eee 8 34 Tire PreSS UG nck rend ed See eek eee ene 8 34 Tre labeling sss scenkedensadceeresced tetas dene 8 38 Types OF Ul eS exe bree wees ASKELEEN 8 41 aene aeceeetu et cecet eee tent eaeeesesenee 8 42 Changing wheels and tires 00 cece eee 8 43 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance Is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your conveni
216. el any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driv er s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts SUN VISORS WPD0435 Coupe shown sedan similar To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the sun visor to the side Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 3 Slide the extension sun visor if so equipped in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position LPDO400 Coupe shown sedan similar VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position when driving in daylight hours A WARNING Use the night position o
217. elt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position with the parking brake fully applied Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped for driver s seat Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery Coupe Pull up on the upper seatback release lever to release the seatback only Push the seat back forward to allow for access to items behind the front seat Push the seatback to the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback to the upright and locked position The up per seatback release lever does not need to be used 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0841 AWARNING Before driving the vehicle return the seat back to an upright seating position after manually releasing it Also make sure the seat is locked in place Failure to do so may cause the
218. em announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session International For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters please say international When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the amp button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands Help The system announces the avail able commands Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for
219. eminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte nance The ignition should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Additionally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioners cannot be repaired Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Cor rect supplemental air bag and preten sioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal pro cedures
220. ems Compact disc CD changer operation With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion press one of the CD changer 1 6 but tons Once the CD slot has open insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided auto matically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the ON OFF VOL control knob will start the compact disc Loading buttons 1 Disc Load Press one of the CD changer 1 6 select buttons for less than 1 5 seconds then in sert the CD While in CD mode press one of the station and CD select 1 6 buttons on the radio then insert the CD While in CD mode press one of the CD 1 6 keys on the screen then insert the CD All Disc Load Press and hold one of the CD changer 1 6 buttons for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer When one of the CD changer 1 6 buttons is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play DISC button When the DISC button is pressed with the sys tem off and a compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play W
221. en re moved Failure to follow these instruc tions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 Components Adjustment 1 Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level 2 Adusimentnoiches with the center of the seat occupant s ears 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down LRSO890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating posi tion Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk
222. ence both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance Is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service Is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on tt You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAIN
223. enger compart ment to further improve the defogging per formance Rear window defroster switch For more information about the rear window de froster switch see Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turn the fan control dial S manually control the fan speed left or right to Press the S OFF button to turn the system off Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The indicator light on the switch will come on The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF or mode Air flow control Push the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet a 4 Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets s Air flows mainly from foot outlets wi Air flows from defroster and foot outlets lt 7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the S OFF button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maxim
224. engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m 7 Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary WDI0494 WDI0495 QR25DE VQ35DE CHANGING ENGINE O
225. er attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information Ja 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Instrument panel 222020 226 ysewheeieves eee beeedees 0 8 Exterior TON cc useacces carci badecpaee des adune hae ae 0 3 Engine compartment check locations 0 10 Exterior Fealceccsigesstetucehee deed cautantensseedus 0 5 Warning indicator lightS 0c cece eee ee ees 0 12 Passenger compartment 0 eee ee eee eee 0 7 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1 Top tether strap anchor P
226. erly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD RESTRAINTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 AWARNING Infants and small children should al ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle Failure to use a child restraint can re sult in serious injury or death Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle Also do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat NISSAN recommends that the child re straint be installed in the rear seat Ac cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a front facing child re straint in the front seat see Child re straint installation using the seat belts later in this section Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk
227. es Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underest
228. es downward as illustrated To remove the Intelligent Key from the port push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull the Intelligent Key out of the port NOTE The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery If you see the low battery indicator replace the battery as soon as possible See NISSAN Intelligent Key battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section A CAUTION Never place anything except the Intelli gent Key in the Intelligent Key port Do ing sO may cause damage to the equipment Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the correct direction when inserting it to the Intelligent Key port The engine may not start if it is in the wrong direction Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position Starting and driving 5 9 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Lock all doors Position seat and adjust head restraints Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning li
229. es may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 5 28 Starting and driving 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowadrifts Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser voir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sud
230. escribed in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking Starting and driving 5 23 To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness 5 24 Starting and driving When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Inf
231. essed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator A CD icon indicator appears on the display when a CD is loaded with the system on AUX Auxiliary button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas sette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop com puters Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack TUNE FOLDER SLJ eo 2 3 4 5 PUSH AUDIO LHA0730 RADIO button Touch screen keys vary depending on what function is selected SEEK TRACK button TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control knob BASS TREBLE BALANCE FADE and SSV if so equipped Station and CD select 1 6 buttons CD insert slot CD changer select 1 6 buttons amp CD eject button AUX jack A B C button ON OFF VOL control knob CD AUX button No satellite radio reception is available unless there Is an active XM satellite radio service subscription Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not opera tional then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER if so equipped For all operation precautions see A
232. esult in serious personal injury Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury e Work on a
233. etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and s
234. f performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 ii ila SAFETY DEFECTS US only If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highwa
235. f additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use After the hitch is removed seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes water or dust from entering the passenger compartment Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted 9 20 Technical and consumer information Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds t
236. front facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a front facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child The instructions in this section apply to child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seat or the front passenger seat restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraint adjustment in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head re straint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjust able head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating posi tion or a different child restraint WRS0680 Front facing step 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be
237. g The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands a call Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel Say plus for available only when using the Call International command amp amp PHONE SEND Press the button to initiate a VR Say pause for a 2 second pause available i l session or answer an incoming call only when storing a phone book number kkk You can say star for and pound for at any time in any position of the phone number available only when using Call In ternational commana You can also use the button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call See List of voice commands and During a call later in this section for more information 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems ae PHONE END Press the button to cancel a VR session or end a call GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands later in this section Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the AF button for more than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND
238. gainst the door AWARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear impact rollover or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents AWARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks The
239. gh they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera tion The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators It also monitors informa tion from the crash zone sensor the Air bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sensor pattern sen sor Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger the occupant classification sensor is also monitored Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensor If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system ple
240. ghts when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual 5 10 Starting and driving STARTING THE ENGINE Apply the parking brake Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions Manual transmission Move the shift selector to N Neutral De press the clutch pedal to the floor The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully de pressed Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal if so equipped and push the ignition switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and while holding crank the engine Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Push the ignition switch to the ON posi tion to start cranking the engine After 5
241. gnition systems BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System amp Bluetooth If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds Ifthe amp amp button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the l button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked
242. h When scanning SCAN blinks in the display Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station Station memory operations 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations 1 Press the PRESET A B C button to change between storage banks The radio displays the icon A B or C to indicate which set of presets are active 2 Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard The radio mutes when the select button is pressed 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio turns off and the last used compact d
243. h or damage the rear window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PH
244. h the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer A WARNING e Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous e Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine Is running it may indicate the charging system Is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the drive belt If the belt is loose broken missing or If the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately A CAUTION Do not continue driving if the drive belt is loose broken or missing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT check warning light if so equipped When the ignition switch is
245. he Mainte nance and do it yourself section Because the steering wheel is locked electrically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged Un locking the steering wheel is impossible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent Key port Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipme
246. he ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRSO761 LRSO669 LRS0670 Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing Rear facing step 3 Rear facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the extended At this time the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 7 Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor the retrac tor is in the ALR mode 8 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 7 After the child restraint is removed and the seat
247. he instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis Shift the shift selector to the P position play and the inside warning chime sounds The shift selector is not in the P position continuously Ea l l The ignition switch is in the ACC position ee ae SPICE SYM E When opening the driver s door to get out f The inside warning chime sounds position of the vehicle continuously The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli port gent Key port The NO KEY warning appears on the Place the ignition switch in the OFF display the outside chime sounds 3 times The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and the inside warning chime sounds for position approximately 3 seconds When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle The NO KEY warning appears on the dis The ignition switch is in the ACC position Mov
248. he performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood 3 Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only genuine NISSAN parts Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch a
249. hecks and adjustments Opening the trunk lid 1 Push the trunk opener request switch for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel ligent Key with you 2 The trunk will unlatch A chime will sound 4 times 3 Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the trunk lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Locking doors 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the button on the Intelligent Key The hazard warning lights fl
250. heel Once the call has ended press the button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call or Call International Phone Book Memo Pad Setup When you press and release the amp F button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response When you get used to the menus in the system you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time For example say Call five five five one two one two or Memo pad record Also when you get used to the system re sponses
251. hen the DISC button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play TUNE FOLDER knob While playing an MP3 CD to skip through folders turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to skip forward or backward through the available fold ers This function will only operate on an MP3 CD with multiple folders Folder key While playing an MP3 CD you can select a track inside a folder Touch the Folder key a list screen displays Touch one of the folder select keys another list screen displays Touch one of the file select keys the system will start playing that track in the selected folder A VO SEEK TRACK button When the SEEK TRACK button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a com pact disc is playing the track being played re turns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the SEEK TRACK 4 button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will ad vance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played When pressing the SEEK TRACK 4 fast forward or rewind butto
252. hese power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly installed AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regu lations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connec tion for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking systems are activated by a
253. ide mirrors oaoa a 3 29 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 9 Owner s manual order form 9 27 Owner s manual service manual order information cae amp ee eee ee ee 9 27 Pp Parking Parking brake operation 5 18 Parking parking onhills 5 22 Phone Bluetooth hands free SVSIEM aoaaa a e 4 46 4 61 Power Power door locks oouausaaaaaa aa 3 5 Power outlet aoaaa 2 36 Power rear WINdOWS 2 45 Power steering fluid 8 13 Power steering system aoaaa aaa 5 23 Power windows saaa aaa aaa 2 44 Rear power windows 2 45 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 Precautions on child restraints 0 1 23 1 33 1 39 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 15 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEM a s s a os w bdie BES OH ee SG 1 43 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Programmable features 4 3 PUSH Staring ict a8 Sm wea ee he A 6 9 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 45 Compact Disc CD changer 4 34 4 40 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player 2 2 eee eee 4 27 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer 24 ss26 0s 4 4 31 4 38 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 0 0 ee 9 26 Rear power windows saoao oaa 2 45 Real Sedl oo enaa 2 Gee a a e 1 9 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC amp ce s ee a ee es ee eee 2 28 RearView M
254. ild restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 5 CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Front air bags inflate with great force A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child e NISSAN recommends that child re straints be installed in the rear seat However if you must install a front facing child restraint in the front pas senger seat move the passenger seat to the rearmost position Also be sure the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated to indicate the passenger air bag is OFF See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this sec tion for details The three point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which must be used WRS0699 when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause in jury to the child in a sudden stop or collision A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen ger seat Front facing front passenger seat step 1 Front facing Follow these steps to install a
255. iler weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg or more trailers with a brake system must be used The Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using Improper towing equipment could ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and per formance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of th
256. ill be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road ina safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency
257. illumi nated vocal feedback during voice recognition system is activated Touch the Voice Feedback ON key to disable the vocal feedback during voice recognition TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number Try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG 1 Ensure that the command format is valid See Command list in this section NIZED or the system fails to interpret the 2 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level command correctly 3 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized 4 If optional words of the command have been omitted then the command should be tried with these in place The system consistently selects the wrong 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory voicetag or Phone Directory command 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 MEMO 4 74 Moni
258. imate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu tive times in quick succession or the igni tion switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven this could lead to a crash and serious injury When the ignition switch is pushed without de pressing the brake pedal CVT or the clutch pedal MT the ignition switch position will illu minate as follows Push center once to change to ACC two times to change to ON three times to return to OFF The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position Starting and driving 5 7 The ignition switch is equipped with an anti theft steering lock device The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position CVT or N Neutral position MT When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to ward the OFF p
259. ing this 10 second period stops the scan and the current loaded CD will remain playing MP3 SCAN mode 1 Disc All Folders While listening to an MP3 CD press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track in each folder on the MP3 CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD re mains on that track and folder All Discs 1 Track 1 Folder While listening to an MP3 CD with other CDs loaded into the CD changer press and hold the SCAN button for approximately 2 seconds to preview the first 10 seconds of the first track in the first folder on the MP3 CDs loaded Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the current loaded CD will remain playing amp COD Eject Current Selected disc Press the amp button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected Also if the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be canceled When this button is pr
260. intenance precautionS sssusa arrra eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system cc se eeecaeearertendaeenanes 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 005 8 8 Changing engine coolant s sssaaa saraaa 8 9 PRONG Olleducsscatgeockoestetececeeed pa EE ES 8 9 Checking engine oil level 00 005 8 9 Changing engine oil scsic 0ntieeneeeteksadwdedy 8 10 Changing engine oil filter a na 8 12 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid 8 13 Power steering fluid 0200e eee eee eee 8 13 Brake and clutehn NU a2 sees eee ee cone ek 8 14 Prak ee ereer eat bu anaes kare a amp 8 14 CIUICH TIC 2 ru sre nune eaer i E E E 8 14 Window washer fluid s an anana 8 15 Window washer fluid reservoir 8 15 Balely I E E E EET 8 15 JUMP Staring sorsan edan eieren EAE EEEE AERE 8 17 Drive Del cewuecctansencencankeuas noah E ears 8 17 Sy O21 42 0 6 a ee ee ee ee er ee 8 18 Replacing Spark plUGS lt 2 s24s2ssce06eeseasaess 8 18 PAP cleaner 242 sagncncceeead cued sssedaceseGaders ct 8 19 In cabin microfilter e252 2c2e eeecAe2neeuSsenee 8 19 Windshield wiper blades 02 0 00e 8 20 ClCANING sin tactenseaeeeeGona E S R 8 20 ReDIGCING teeta adeauceeretcenreteoesene aerate 8 20 EV OKCS xc acyac races caisecadapeeteceesd ETATIS eee ears 8 21 Self adjusting brakes cece e eee ees 8 21 Brake pad wear indicators 0eeeea
261. ion Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 1 Wear indicator 2 Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those re
262. ion Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing 7 6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy
263. ion is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex tremely low even if manual shift mode is selected This is not a malfunction When CVT fluid warms up manual mode can be selected When the CVT fluid temperature is high the shift range may upshift in lower rom than usual This is not a malfunction Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift selector button pushed If the battery is discharged completely the steer ing wheel cannot be locked or unlocked Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section Contact your NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service To move the shift selector complete the following procedure 1 Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 4 Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down 5 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 6 Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel Now the ve hicle may be moved to the desired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NI
264. ion systems Compact disc CD player A CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time e Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn
265. ire at the same time e Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed A CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam age to the vehicle Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire ground clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught 8 46 Maintenance and do it yourself 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation 0 00 cee rnaner 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil FECOMIMENGAONS xin sar od sarte nedre sie acc ecie wae 9 6 SPCCHICAHIONS civ acnexheaveht Pennie beers eee weates 9 7 ENO DO carener EEEE AS a 9 7 Wheels and tires annuau naana anana 9 8 Dimensions and weights 2 5 5 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY 0 dined adamanke shee cduindewe Nake ana 9 9 Vehicle identification nsn asana cede rte ewedwdet es 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle identification number chassis number s 0 6044 lt 04000 sed den weeded nnn 9 9 Engine serial number 2 222005 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label
266. isc starts to play A v TUNE FF REW Fast For ward Rewind button When the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the compact disc returns to normal play speed A W SEEK TRACK button When 4 is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning Press several times to skip several tracks Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 Each time the button is pressed the CD ad vances 1 additional track The track number ap pears in the display window When the last track on the compact disc is skipped the first track is played When is pressed the track being played returns to the beginning Press several times to skip back several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track RDM RPT button When the RDM RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Random Disc gt Repeat Track gt Normal Random Disc The order of the tracks on the disc will be mixed during play Repeat Track The track that is currently playing will be repeated SCAN CDs button Press the SCAN button less than 1 5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track The SCA
267. ision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Front facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting
268. itch and hold it down 4 To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function Sf QW LICO410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is Closing Instruments and controls 2 45 Auto reverse function lf the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing the window will be imme diately lowered The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which ca
269. ite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 A v TUNE FF REW tuning button Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y for manual tuning To move quickly through the channels hold the tuning buttons down A Vv SEEK tuning button Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or Y to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN button SCAN illuminates in the display window Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies Scan tuning stops for 5 sec onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi cient signal strength When scanning SCAN blinks in the display Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station Station memory operations 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM station
270. ith the seat belts Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat WRS0699 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 4 Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing 5 Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing LRSO451 WRS0812 Rear center position Rear outboard position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If neces sary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit See Head restraint adjustment earlier in this section If the head restraint is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it Is interfering wi
271. ivated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Unfastening the seat belts CA To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer 1 21
272. iving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year
273. k release lever coupe Pull the upper seatback release lever Q to the uppermost position folding the seatback forward 2 releasing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked Operating tips The seatback and track will not lock until the seat back is returned rearward The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point The seatback will return to an upright seating position if the upper seatback release lever is pulled to the uppermost position FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading as shown Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 1 Open the access cover on the rear parcel e Closely supervise children when they shelf are around cars to prevent them from 2 Push down on the button on the rear parcel playing and becoming locked in the sheit trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear 3 Fold down the passenger s side seatback seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s WARNING access to car keys Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passenge
274. kips als specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright protection there next song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 RADIO button 13 CD button 14 DISP button 15 PRESET A B C button 16 Station select 1 6 buttons 17 X pause mute button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section Audio main operation f PRESET T ABC 4 6 AUDIO 77 gt PWR VOL control knob RDM AUX IN j Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON ae PARIEE oe RPT SCAN CLOCK 7 6 position then press the PWR VOL control knob J If you listen to the radio with the engine not 9 8 7 running place the ignition in the ACC position The mode radio or CD that was playing imme diately before the system was turned off resu
275. l through the opening A CAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID For further brake and clutch fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recom mended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add DOT 3 brake fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer CLUTCH FLUID Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir manual transmissions only If the fluid level is below the MIN line add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX
276. laying an MP3 TUNE FF REW amp or Y button to scan forward or backward through available folders press the To fast forward or rewind through an MP3 audio track press the TUNE FF REW 4 or button for more than 1 5 seconds A VO SEEK TRACK button When 4 is pressed while the compact disc is playing the track following the present one starts to play from the beginning Press 4 several times to skip several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD advances 1 additional track The track number appears in the display window When the last track on the compact disc is skipped the first track is played When is pressed the track being played returns to the beginning Press several times to skip back several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 RDM RPT button When the RDM RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Random All Discs Random Disc Repeat Disc Repeat Track normal Random All Discs Random All Discs The loaded discs will be played randomly not in sequence of how they are loaded Random Disc The tracks on the current selected disc will be played randomly Repeat Disc The disc that is currently playing will be repeated Repeat Track The current track will be repeated
277. ld quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals MAX A C button Front window defrost button Air recirculation button The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets Air flow control buttons e Do not use the recirculation mode for Fan speed control system OFF dial CONTROLS long periods as it may cause the interior 2 Air flow control buttons air ET stale and the windows to 3 Temperature control dial Fan control dial fog up 4 Air conditioner button The fan control dial turns the fan on and off and 5 Rear window defroster controls fan speed 6 7 8 MAX Air flows from center and side A C vents with maximum cooling 74 Air flows from center and side vents Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 gt a s Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets F Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets Q7 Air flows mainly from defroster outlets Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the temperature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right Air recirculation button On position Indicator light on Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle Press the button to the on position when driving o
278. le weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 15 TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 16 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals tra
279. lected in any screen that allows for preferences to be programmed Once the screen is selected you have the option to reset the selected distances or time to a new setting MAINTENANCE SBACK gt OIL FILTER gt ENGINE OIL gt TIRE gt OTHER GENTER NEXT Maintenance mode The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the following engine oil oil filter tires other Set a desired interval by pushing to high light the maintenance field and pressing The reset mode will open up and allow you to enter the desired distance DISPLAY SBACK gt LANGUAGE gt UNIT NEXT QENTER Display mode The LANGUAGE UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language Unit key and pressing Language English or French Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C L 100 km You can select the language and unit using the O button and pressing The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button gt SKIP gt DETAIL GENTER NEXT Warning mode The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle Information Dis play indicator lights and warnings l
280. lled in the Intelligent Key slot Valet hand off When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand off follow the proce dures below 1 Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position 2 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 3 Lock the glove box and the rear seats with the mechanical key 4 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Trunk lid later in this section Storage in the Instruments and controls section and Seats in the Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle The master key can be used for all the locks Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key This is because the regis tration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains a
281. lso come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank SERVIC After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The Sie light should turn off after a few driving trips Ifthe SMF light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam
282. m h and maintain the speed for at least 3 min utes 8 Stop the vehicle Place the transmission se lector lever in the P Park or N Neutral position 9 Turn the engine off 10 Repeat steps 1 8 at least one more time If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted repeat the preceding step Any safe driving mode is accept able between steps Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal dr
283. manufacturers recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened lf the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an 4 explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suita
284. mation on selecting ringtones Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call A Number speak digits Dial 1 Press the button on steering wheel A tone will sound Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Call International to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say In ternational See How to say numbers ear lier in this section for more information 4 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 5 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the l button on the steering w
285. me you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 AWARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be properly re strained in the rear seat and if appro priate in a child restraint 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING The seat belt should be properly ad justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly AWARNING Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not all
286. memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Instruments and controls 2 51 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed 4 Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro 2 52 Instruments and controls grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near
287. mes playing 1 SEEK TRACK button 6 CLOCK button Wh CD is loaded the radi 2 CD insert slot 7 AUX IN jack en no is loaded the radio comes on Pressing the PWR VOL control knob again turns 3 TUNE FF REW button 8 SCAN button Meet 4 amp CD eject button 9 RDM RPT button 5 AUDIO button BASS TREBLE FADE 10 PWR VOL control knob Turn the PWR VOL control knob to the right to and BALANCE 11 AUX button increase volume or to the left to decrease volume Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 AUDIO button Bass Treble Fade and Bal ance Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Beep ON OFF Audio Bass To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap pears in the display Press the TUNE FF FREW amp or Y to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the TUNE FF REW button to adjust Fade and Balance mode Fade adjusts the sound level be tween the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker To turn the Beep sound off or on press the AUDIO button until Beep is displayed Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y _ until the desired mode is displayed This turns on or turns off the beep sound when audio buttons are pressed Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO button repeatedly until
288. moothly Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe Conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake and clutch fluid levels Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
289. mponents and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region API certification mark ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval API service symbol Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity
290. n 22 ccxsar tans ceuea peeecoreeewce 4 12 Air conditioner operation 0 00 4 13 Ar HOW Chats 2 ccatws canen vee Bia aE eee ars 4 14 Heater and air conditioner automatic if so equipped occanceasncenuteraaessceseuccunans 4 18 Automatic operation 2 220020e eee eee 4 18 Manual operation 2 cc lt kctwneetiaws S4455eu cee ene 4 19 Operating TIPS cece eascaen des dsantonaated fees 4 20 Servicing air CONCINONEl 6s dawn di senen de caus stews 4 20 Audio system if so equipped 0 cece aes 4 21 ela o ucaee occa E E ech oteanseaeeaa eats 4 21 FM radio reception 2225 22 vie nceecensedesxaeaese AM radio reception sxmeviseevactievudreeaseane Satellite radio reception if so equipped Audio operation precautions 00e0 eee FM AM radio with compact disc CD player FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer if so equipped cece eee es FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer if so equipped eee e eee CD care and cleaning 2 0eeeee eee Steering wheel switch for audio control fso eCUIDOEU schnceccenscocteraaeeaneeceanas PUMCON AS hatece reer E T Car phone or CB radio cascrticeucescenws peeves eees Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System if so equipped 5 Regulatory Information 2 4s0cc0ie2sedwaxttxdeaws Using the system 60 00 nee wie am cut ew neds ne ade Se Control DUHONS J scaed boc cte
291. n a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment for maximum cooling when using the air con ditioner Off position Indicator light off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart ment and distributed through the selected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button The button is provided only on vehicles equipped with an air conditioner Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the button to turn on the air conditioner The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner push the 4 button again The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Rear window defroster switch For more information about the rear window de froster switch see Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 1 Press the button to the OFF position for normal heating 2 Press the Fad air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position be
292. n electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 DOORS AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPDO181 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front 4 of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral 3 where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows if so equipped The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the door key
293. n electronic sig nal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill an
294. n entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name If you do not wish to store another location the system ends the VR session Edit Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry When prompted by the system say the name of the entry you wish to edit The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit Say the name of the location The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions
295. n for more than 1 5 seconds the CD being played will fast for ward or rewind When the button is released the CD will return to normal play speed Track key While playing a CD or an MP3 CD you can select a track or file on the disc Touch the Track key a list screen displays Touch one of the track or file select keys the system will start playing that track or file CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded Touch one of the CD select 1 6 keys on the touch screen or Press one of the station and CD select 1 6 buttons on the radio or Press one of the CD changer 1 6 select buttons Scan key While listening to a CD touch the Scan key to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the current CD playing Touching the Scan key during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track Repeat key When the Repeat key is touched while a com pact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 MP3 CD 1 DISC RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRACK RPT 1 DISC RPT The disc that is currently playing will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT The folder that is currently play ing will be repeated Random key When the Random key is tou
296. n sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some Sit upright and well back conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained Pre teens and children should be properly re strained in the rear seat if possible Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this section for details Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 Do not lean a
297. n the VDC system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop erly The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction AWARNING The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is designed to help maintain traction with the road surface but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering opera tion at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are ex tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly This could adversely affect ve hicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the
298. n the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System later in this section Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and pairing You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the DVD ROM for the navigation system is inserted into the player
299. nchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is at tached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH anchors AWARNING Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown If a Child restraint is not secured properly your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident WRS0829 if so equipped Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re straints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap
300. nd Continued use of the i system may result in accident fire or electric shock gt the system hardware spill liquid on it In case you notice any foreign object in or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN O wD MAP 5 dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock JL JE JEJE JL 1 44 2 brightness control button 6 DEST button P 4 7 2 TILT button For Navigation system control buttons refer to 3 INFO button the separate Navigation System Owner s 4 SETUP button P 4 3 Manual 5 MAP button 4 2 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will use up all the battery power and the engine will not start Reference symbols SETUP button This is a button on the control panel Display key This is a select key on the touch screen By touching this key you can proceed to the next function SETTING UP THE START UP SCREEN With the ignition to ACC or ON the SYSTEM START UP warning is displayed on the screen Read the warning and touch the I agree key English or the Enter Fran ais key If you do not touch the I agree key the Naviga tion system will not proceed to the next
301. nd around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unautho rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occu pants However all of the information cau tions and warnings in this manual still ap ply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflat
302. nd memory B If memory A is available the system will use memory A to store the model If memory A is in use and memory B is available the system will use memory B to store the model If both of the memory locations are in use the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park AT and CVT models or N Neutral MT models 3 Press and hold the l button for more than 5 seconds 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END _ button to select a dif ferent language 5 Press the AF button 10 11 For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language earlier in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the amp F button The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an
303. nd the headlight switch are OFF 2 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself 3 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WDI0452 Type A If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse 5 Push the fuse box cover to install 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer BATTERY REPLACEMENT A CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts Type B Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2032 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice
304. ne at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and pairing You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While acellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular pho
305. nel buttons Door locks Drive belt Driving Cold weather driving Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 0 Driving with manual transmission Precautions when starting and driving Economy fuel Emission control information label Emission control system warranty Engine Before starting the engine Block heater 0 4 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 04 Changing engine coolant Changing engine oil Changing engine oilfilter 8 12 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Checking engine oil level 8 9 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 8 ENGNG Olli sao eA my amp ee Bee eS 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Engine oil viscosity 1 ee ees 9 5 Engine serialnumber 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 10 English metric setting 4 6 Event datarecorders 9 27 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Eyeglass case xt key oe Ge Se haw 2 38 E Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 PIEI 2 acne bee eae ee e oS 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid 24 2 4 ooo ya eee we 4 8 14 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants
306. nes lf the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice reco
307. ng doors 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the button on the Intelligent Key The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Press the f button on the Intelligent Key 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the M button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the M button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments Releasing the trunk lid Press the hami button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
308. ning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Window washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual No key warning This warning illuminates following two condi tions 1 When the ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system If this warning illuminates you can not start the engine Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely Re place the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system Use the regis tered Intelligent Key You do not have an Intelligent Key with you Carry an Intelligent Key with you 2 When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch Is placed in the ACC or ON position A chime will also sound Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven SHIFT P warning CVT models This warning illumin
309. nly when neces sary because it reduces rear view clarity AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims according to the intensity of the head lights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instrument and controls sec tion of this manual For information on the compass display see Compass display in the Instrument and con trols section of this manual NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors 2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation OUTSIDE MIRRORS AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects
310. nnot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window 2 46 Instruments and controls When power window switch does not operate If the power window automatic function closing only does not operate properly perform the fol lowing procedure to initialize the power window system 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch 3 Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed 4 Release the power window switch Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected 5 Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure see a NISSAN dealer for assistance MOONROOF if so equipped ON DOOR OFF il il Q ED Q D AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds po
311. ns that the engine will start by pushing the push button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed Engine start operation indicator MT mod els This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF ACC or ON position with the shift selector in neutral and the parking brake on This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and the brake pedal depressed 2 24 Instruments and controls NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indica tor This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port For example the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged If this indicator illuminates insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct direction See Push button ignition switch in the Starting and driving section NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indicator This indicator illuminates when the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the Intelligent Key port A key reminder chime also sounds If this indicator illuminates remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace
312. nt and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key system s operat ing range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 33 ft 10 m of the vehicle HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Locki
313. nt panel goes out Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out Starting and driving 5 19 The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you depress the clutch pedal manual trans mission or move the shift selector to N Neutral CVT or A T To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h 5 20 Starting and driving To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time
314. ntil the desired zone entry number is displayed Once the desired zone number is displayed stop pressing the button and the display will show compass direction within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii instruments and controls 2 7 2 8 Instruments and controls If a magnet is located near the com pass or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed the compass display may not indicate the correct direction In places where the terrestrial magne tism is disturbed the correction of the direction starts automatically Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure 1 With the display turned on press and hold the switch for about 9 seconds The display will read C Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h After completing the circles the display should return to normal If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment have the compass checked at an authorized NISSAN dealer The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve hicle moves to an area where the geomag netism is stabilized A CAUTION
315. ntly requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL LDI0555 QR25DE engine CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way _ POT E 2 LDI0556 VQ35DE engine Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 Chr EES 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If th
316. nute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Starting and driving 5 3 Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low out
317. o phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Phonebook Voicetag Directory Yil 8 21 Back 1 None Add New 2 None Add New 3 None Add New 4 None Add New cr 4 a 7 5 None Add New 5 Operate the cellular phone to send a per son s name and phone number from the memory of the cellular phone The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer See the cellular phone Own er s Manual for more details If you want to add a voice tag touch the Yes key on the Add a voice tag screen For example if the partner s name is David speak David while the Store voice tag screen is on the display The David voice tag is stored in the phonebook Voice tag is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the voice recognition system For more infor Settings gt Phonebook Mill 8 94 Enter Data by Keypad Downloaded Phonebook Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls Bluetooth mation see NISSAN Voice Recognition System later in this section 7 When the phonebook download is com pleted the screen will return to the name list of the phonebook There are different methods to input a phone number Select one of the following options in stead of the Bluetooth key in step 4 above Enter Data by Keypad Input the name and phone number manually Settings gt
318. o 3rd 25 40 17 27 3rd to 4th 33 53 25 40 Ath to 5th 44 71 36 58 5th to 6th 51 82 51 82 For VQ35DE GEAR CHANGE ACCEL shift CRUISE shift point MPH point MPH km h km h 1st to 2nd 15 25 9 14 2nd to 3rd 25 40 19 30 3rd to 4th 31 50 26 42 4th to 5th 36 58 31 50 5th to 6th 43 69 37 59 For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas over 4 000 ft 1219 ml For QR25DE Gear change MPH km h 1st to 2nd 8 13 2nd to 3rd 17 27 3rd to 4th 25 40 4th to 5th 36 58 5th to 6th 51 82 For VQ35DE Gear change MPH km h 1st to 2nd 15 24 2nd to 3rd 25 40 3rd to 4th 40 64 Ath to 5th 45 72 5th to 6th 50 80 Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly or if you need to accelerate Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed shown below in any gear For level road driving use the highest gear suggested for that speed Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions which will en sure safe operation Do not over rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control GEAR QR25DE VQ35DE MPH km h MPH km h 1st 32 53 36 58 2nd 59 95 58 93 3rd 82 133 81 131 4th Sth 6th Starting and driving 5 17 PARKING BRAKE AWARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Fail
319. o the camera the RearView Monitor may not display ob jects Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolora tion To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use body wax on the camera window If body wax does get on the camera window wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 VENTS o TTS WHA0736 WHA0737 Right and Left Center Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides Open or close the vents by using the dial Move the dial toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems WHAO688 Rear sedan if so equipped HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual if so equipped AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Pa Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle cou
320. o the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bags are de signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occu pants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finish ers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Sit upright and well back AWARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower
321. o the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Im proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag Use the recommended viscosity engine oll See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual Starting and driving 5 21 PARKING PARKING ON HILLS AWARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park for CVT models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models Fail ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re sult in an accident Make sure the shift 5 22 Starting and driving selector has been pushed as far for ward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children co
322. oad capacity 500 Ib 227 kg LTI0152 Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of Weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Inf
323. oad specification 9 19 Trailer towing saaa i ew 9 16 Traction control system TCS off switch Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 51 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVT HUNG oe es Bak ae ee ee ee 8 13 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 0 5 11 Driving with manual transmission 5 16 Selector lever lock release 5 14 Travel See registering your vehicle in another GOUN bite Go ke bre ee oo ee Se T 9 9 Tipodometer s es oe ta we bd aaa we 4 2 4 Troubleshooting guide NISSAN voice recognition system 4 73 Trunk access through the rearseat 1 9 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 23 Tank igis a oo 34 6 2 6 tod amp ee Dy Bp 2 50 Turn signal switch 2 33 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 V Vanity MITOP s 6m uae E 3 28 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 8 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 35 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 26 Vehicle identification 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 000 eee 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 12 Vehicle recovery a aaoun es 6 12 Vehicle security system aoaaa aoaaa 2 25 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 3 Ventilators so aaa a 4 10 VO
324. oil 6 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Manual transmission gear oil QR25DE VQ35DE QR25DE VQ35DE QR25DE VQ35DE Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid Power steering fluid PSF Brake and clutch fluid Multi purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil Windshield washer fluid Capacity Approximate US measure Imp measure 20 gal 16 5 8 gal 4 7 8 qt 4 qt 4 7 8 qt 4 qt 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 qt 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 qt 2 gal 1 5 8 gal 2 1 8 gal 1 3 4 gal 1 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 2 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 3 DEXRON VI type ATF can be used 4 Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer 5 For further details see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 6 For further details see Engine Oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 9 2 Technical and consumer information Liter 75 6 4 6 4 6 4 3 4 3 7 6 8 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants See Fuel recommendation later in this section Engine oil with API Certification Mark 1 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 1 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreez
325. older title displays the title of the folder Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing Artist name displays the name of the artist of the song playing Song title displays the title of the song playing Satellite equipped To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio if so equipped press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows Channel num ber Category name Channel name Artist name Song title radio display mode if so Channel number displays the channel num ber of the selected satellite radio station Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station Channel name displays the channel name the selected satellite radio station Artist name displays the name of the artist host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station Song title displays the song title show name or temperature of the selected satel lite radio station FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows AM FM gt SAT satellite if so equipped When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM satellite radio service subscription Satell
326. ome on or does not go off have the Traction Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer s Traction Control System off indicator light if so equipped This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF This indi cates the Traction Control System is not operat ing Push the traction control off switch again or re start the engine and the system will operate nor mally See Traction Control System TCS in the Starting and driving section of this manual The traction control light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the Traction Control System TCS is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving have the Traction Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Traction Control System is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerat ing but this is normal 2 16 Instruments and controls Turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indicator light if so equipped This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has been turned off
327. omething being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof 2 48 Instruments and controls AWARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonr
328. on mode For information about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section 5 seconds Push the the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass display 4 on or off The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle s heading button for about 1 second when N North E East S South W West If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles COMPASS DISPLAY Push the button when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The direction will be displayed Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Establish your location on the zone map Refer to the illustration Record your zone number 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Push the button in for 5 seconds until the current zone entry number is displayed 4 Press the button repeatedly u
329. on of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving For manual transmission models move the shift selector to N Neutral For CVT models move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and
330. onitor naaa aaa 4 8 Recorders Event datas 2 caa ete be os a aA 9 27 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 S Safety Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Child seat belts 1 23 1 33 1 39 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Rear seat adjustment 1 9 Seat belt Child safety a 2 oe amp Row we a 1 18 Infants and small children 1 18 Injured Person a a a8 em em ww oe a we 1 19 Larger children 60 005 ea ee wat w 1 18 Precautions on seat belt usage 15 Pregnantwomen 4 1 19 Seat belt extenders 1 22 Seat belt maintenance 1 23 Seat belts i2 46 koa Ge oe ea ee s 1 15 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 22 Three point type with retractor 1 19 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Seatback pockets 00 2 37 Seats Adjustment 2 204 1 2 Front sals s a co are otoa Anoka eo aos 1 2 Heated seats noaa aaa aa 2 34 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Rear Soal c 2 5 rdia e Oo E Be oo 8 1 9 Security indicator light 2 15 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 26 3 3 Self adjusting brakes 0 4 8 21 Service manual
331. oof INTERIOR LIGHT ON DOOR OFF 1 9 LIC1081 Type A The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the interior light illuminates regardless of door position The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position When the switch is in the center DOOR position the front and rear personal lights will illuminate when the driver s door is opened Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver s door is closed WIC1267 Type B The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or the driver s door is closed and locked The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when the doors are open When the switch is in the OFF position the interior light does not illuminate regard less of door position NOTE The doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened re gardless of the interior light switch posi tion These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming dis charged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery CONSOLE LIGHT if so equipped The console light will turn on whenever the park ing lights or headlights are illuminate
332. opened while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli gent Key port Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position and take the Intel ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display is located on the bottom of the speedometer It displays such items as cruise control system information Intelligent Key operation information some indicators and warnings other information For details about the Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the button located on the instru ment panel just behind the steering wheel to display the following modes MPG MPG MPH Time Miles Range Exterior Temperature Setting Warning Instruments and controls 2 17 MPG 0 20 40 60 MILES Fuel Economy mode Average speed mode Time Miles km mode The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis The average speed mode can be selected to The time miles km mode can be selected to pla
333. opener motor unit which may activate a training light Instruments and controls 2 53 NOTE Following step 2 there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 3 Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button a second time to com plete the training process Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the train ing The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Universal Transceiver and acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if not yet programmed follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 2 54 Instruments and controls 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink
334. or 6 seconds stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK After cranking the engine release the accelerator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push button ignition switch to start the engine If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the en gine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start 5 To stop the engine shift the selector to the P Park position CVT or to N Neutral and apply the parking brake MT and push the ignition switch to the OFF position DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT if so equipped AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse D Drive or manual shift mode Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed
335. order form 9 27 Servicing airconditioner 4 20 Seip DUON s s a ws poaa wks ae See a 4 3 Shift lock release noaa 5 14 Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission CVT ogra ee aaa a a aea a we 5 12 Manual transmission 5 16 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 22 Spark plug replacement 8 18 Speedometer ooa aa 00002 eee 2 4 Spotlights See map light a oa aaa 2 50 SRS warning label 1 58 Starting Before starting the engine a a 5 10 Jump starting aoaaa aa 6 7 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Push StaMING s aos s a a dana a A 6 9 Starting the engine 5 10 Startup SCIEeN ac saa dand aw eG oH 4 3 Steering Power steering fluid 8 13 Power steering system 5 23 Stop ight 2 6 ak Gren ea Behe a ae 8 28 WIOCIMGG wt ate ec hue eae das tue sad 2 37 SUN VISOS sa web oe ae ow BS ee e a 3 27 Sunglasses case 0 000s 2 38 Sunglasses holder 04 2 38 SUNOD ca 2 aoa eiaa Sk bee Oe a 2 46 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 58 2 14 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 52 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 58 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEMI ae b ee eed ew ee ee 1 43 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 43 Switch Autolight switch aoaaa 2 Sawa 2 30 Automatic power window s
336. orma tion label LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the _ vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehic
337. ormation label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction
338. osition proceed as follows 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position CVT or N Neutral position MT 2 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch position will change to the ON position 3 Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 8 of a right or left turn from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel push the igni tion switch to the LOCK position To unlock the steering wheel push the ignition switch while slightly turning the steering wheel right and left 5 8 Starting and driving If the battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off OFF
339. ou would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct the system asks for a location Home Office Mobile or Other For example say Home The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring a
340. our three seven Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands earlier in this section 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly dats i noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker adaptation SA mode earlier in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phone book earlier in this section phone book 2 Replace one of the names being conf
341. over and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire 7 Close the trunk AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water e Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle In case of emergency 6 7 Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety
342. ow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col l
343. ow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion Is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer
344. ownhill grades M1 First Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 6 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the shift selector to the up side Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the shift selector to the down side Shifts to lower range Starting and driving 5 13 The transmission will automatically down shift the gears For example if you select the 3rd range the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession When canceling the manual shift mode Return the shift selector to the D Drive position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear This helps maintain driving perfor mance and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the en gine speed is too high When the ve hicle speed decreases the transmis sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop 5 14 Starting and driving CVT operat
345. p size or for cleaning The rear center cup holders are located in the rear fold down armrest sedan or in the rear arm rest coupe 2 40 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident WIC1216 Soft bottle holder Soft bottle holder A CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key when locking or unlocking the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop CONSOLE BOX Upper halt Pull up on the driver s side latch to open the upper half of the console box The mat if so equipped may be removed for cleaning The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for phone cord routing to the power outlet Lower half WIC1121 Pull up on the passenger s side latch to open the lower half of the console box A power outlet is
346. ppermost position folding the seatback forward 2 releasing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked Operating tips The seatback and track will not lock until the seatback Is returned rearward The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point The seatback will return to an upright seating position if the upper seatback release lever is pulled to the uppermost position Exiting from the rear seat on the front passenger side using the lower seatback release lever coupe Press on the lower seatback release lever 1 until it reaches the lowermost position Fold the seatback forward releasing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward for access from the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Operating tips The seatback and track will not lock until the seatback is returned rearward The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point The seatback will return to an upright seating position if the lower seatback release lever is pushed to the uppermost position Exiting from the rear seat on the driver s side using the upper seatbac
347. r The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water Instruments and controls 2 27 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH REAR RRGD O RR GW LIC1218 WIC1475 WIC1460 Type A Type B Type C To defrost the rear window glass and outside NOTE mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system These wires make up the antenna for the audio system rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push
348. r compartment to further improve the defogging performance Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Press the CS button to the OFF position 2 Press the 4 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion air flow control button 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield Bs 1 Press the air flow control button 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Whenthe position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on if the out side temperature is more than 36 F 2 C This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The 2 mode automati cally turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and pushinthe button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The ai
349. r conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Press the button to the OFF position 2 Press MAX A C or zi air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the E button the indicator light comes on 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the 7S button to the ON position Be sure to return the CS to the OFF position for normal cooling MAX A C may be used for quick cooling Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 Press the 2 button to the OFF position 2 Press the 4 air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the 4 comes on button The indicator light 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air 1 Press the GY 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Press the 4 comes on air flow control button button The indicator light When the SY or i are selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light will not illuminate if the outside temperature is more than 36
350. r in this section Delete Downloaded Phonebook Delete all of the downloaded phonebook entries 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone book Delete a single entry from the downloaded phonebook Touch the corresponding letter key then touch the name key you wish to delete Touch the Yes key to delete the entry Delete Call Logs Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from the list Phone Ringer Vol Adjust the ring volume to be quieter a an or louder Phone Incoming Vol Adjust the phone incoming volume to be quieter or louder Use Vehicle Ringtone If this item is turned on a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a Call Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 21 Bluetooth Handsfree Paired Phone List Pair Phone Priority Change Remove Paired Phone i Please select an item Bluetooth Setup See the following information for each item e Bluetooth Hands Free If this item is turned off the connection be tween the cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module will be canceled e Paired Phone List Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown on the list e Pair Phone See Pairing Procedure in this section Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 21 Back A Priority Change Remove Paired Phone Bluetooth Info Edit Phone Name
351. rails The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occu pants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The side air bags and curtain air bags op erate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational A WARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehi
352. red circuits include the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor sat ellite sensors occupant classification system front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring bag warning When the ignition is placed in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and or preten sioner systems will not operate in an ac cident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a r
353. return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display pause mute button To mute or pause the audio sound press the X pause mute button Press the amp button again to resume the audio sound FM AM radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows AM FM When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST illuminates during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception A v TUNE FF REW tuning button Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y for manual tuning To move quickly through the channels hold the tuning buttons down A Vv SEEK tuning button Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or Y to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN button SCAN illuminates in the display window Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies Scan tuning stops for 5 sec onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi cient signal strengt
354. road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible A CAUTION NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 7 MEMO 7 8 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 0e cence ees 8 2 General maintenance 00 c cece eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Ma
355. rom the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood TRUNK LID LPD0394 OPENER OPERATION A WARNING Do not drive with the trunk lid open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys To open the trunk lid push the opener switch down To close the trunk lid lower and push the trunk lid down securely NOTE You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli gent Key Refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key earlier in this section 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments Cancel switch if so equipped When the switch located inside the glove box is in the OFF position the power to the trunk lid will be cancelled The trunk can only be opened with the master key or keyfob The trunk lid cannot be opened when using the trunk lid release switch the trunk open request switch Is pressed when the Intelligent Key is in range of the vehicle or the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is pressed INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE AWAR
356. roperly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status However if the seat becomes unoccupied the air bag status light will remain off If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light AF located in the meter and gauges area in the center of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat Also do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave per manent impressions in the seat Such objects can damage the seat or occu pant classification sensor pattern sen sor This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and r
357. rs without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudden stop e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or To fold down the driver s side of the rear seat straps to help prevent it from sliding or reach through the opening and pull on the strap shifting Do not place cargo higher than 4 located behind the seat the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury The rear seats can be locked using the mechani cal key to prevent unauthorized access For more i information on keys refer to Keys in the Pre e When returning the seatbacks to the driving checks and adjustments section of this upright position be certain they are manual completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Center armrest if so equipped Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has be
358. runk eee When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES AWARNING Radio waves could adversely affect elec tric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function The operat ing environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key transmits weak radio waves Environ mental conditions may interfere with the opera tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions
359. s 1 Press the PRESET A B C button to change between storage banks The radio displays the icon A B or C to indicate which set of presets are active 2 Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard The radio mutes when the select button is pressed 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD changer operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will b
360. s extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling Fuel may be under pressure Turn the cap a third of a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury Then remove the cap 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehi
361. s of the vehicle Also do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat Ac cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a booster seat in the front seat see Booster seat installa tion in this section A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Failure to use a three point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious in jury in sudden stop or collision Improper use or improper installation of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident e Do not use towels books pillows or other items in place of a booster seat Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap shoulder belt Booster seats are de signed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child s body to provide the maximum protection dur ing a collision Follow all of the booster seat manufac turer s instructions for installation and use When purchasing a booster seat be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle I
362. s soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or d
363. se types of roads If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the Traction Control System may not operate prop erly and the indicator light may come on The Traction Control System is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road 5 26 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM if so equipped The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving situations the system will control braking and engine output to help keep the vehicle on its steered path When the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is operating the SLIP indicator in the instrument panel blinks lf the SLIP indicator blinks the road condi tions may be slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light in the In struments and controls section Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel As long as these indicator lights are on the traction control function is canceled If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch VDC and TCS functions will be turned off The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off Whe
364. seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child Re straints later in this section Also there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protec tion NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Infants Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use Small children Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight an
365. seat to move in a collision or sudden stop This may result in damage to the seat or personal injury WRSO751 Sedan A CAUTION Do not operate the power recline switch when the seatback has been manually released using the upper seatback re lease lever 1 Doing so can damage the seat Do not pull on the upper seatback re lease lever or the trim to return the seatback to a normal seating position Doing so may damage the seat Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position with the parking brake fully applied Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 t wRS0842 WRSO743 WRS0843 Coupe shown Sedan similar Type A Type B Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s Lumbar support if so equipped for seat driver s seat Pull the lever up or push down
366. seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean witha dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury A CAUTION Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish e Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air
367. should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat b
368. side temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires 5 4 Starting and driving The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening You can also check the pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen if so equipped The order of the tire pres sure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the In case of emergency section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci den
369. sion Memo pad Main Menu Memo Pad Record A Play Delete The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos each up to 20 seconds long 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Record A The system announces Recording and a tone sounds signaling you to begin Speak the information you wish to record clearly When you are done press the amp F or button on the steering wheel A tone sounds and the system announces Memo recorded Another tone sounds to end the VR session Ifthe memo pad is full the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo Play The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest The system ends the VR session If there are no memos recorded the system an nounces No messages to play The system ends the VR session Delete The Delete command erases all memos The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos Setup Main Menu Setup Pair Phone A List Phone Select Phone Change Priority Delete Phone Select Ringtone Bluetooth Off Use the Setup command to change options as sociated with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Pair phone Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat ible phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System NOTE
370. sks you to confirm this action NOTE When you delete a phone the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted Select ringtone F Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands Ringtone The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone If you say No the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit Silent The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone Bluetooth off Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System When the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem is off you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition Also you will not have access to the Phone Book You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve rec ognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A a
371. smission into P Park 6 Turn off the engine 9 22 Technical and consumer information To drive away 1 O A W NN Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks 6 Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete riorate overall handling characteristics Therefore to maintain adequate control re duce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine braking and reduces the need to brake as frequently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels w
372. spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged A CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle body will be damaged Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand snow mud etc Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle Never pull the vehicle at an angle Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus pension steering brake or cooling systems Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive CVT models or 1st Low and R Reverse MT models Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R Reverse and D Drive CVT models or 1st Low and R Reverse MT models e
373. ssure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT FRONT x SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL AVANT NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL REAR Qh ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XX kg or XX lbs Le poids combin des occupants et de cargaison ne devrait jamais exc der XX kg ou XX Ib Tire and loading information label Q Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle 2 Vehicle load limit See loading infor mation in the Technical and con sumer information section 3 Original tire size The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE PNEU TAILLE ORIGINALE PRESSION DES PNEUS FROIDS FRONT AVANT P XXX XXR XX XXX kPa XX psi P XXX XX R XX XXX kPa XX psi SPARE DE SECOURS T XXX XX R XX XXX kPa XX psi SEE QUFNER S MANUAL FOR ADD JIONAL INFORMATION POUR D AUT S DETAILS SE REPORTER RU MANUEL DU CONDUCTEUR Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COL
374. ssure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter Spare tire TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Observe the following precautions if the TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident AWARNING The spare tire should be used for emer gency use only It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor tunity to avoid possible tire or differen tial damage Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 bar With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH 80 km h When driving on roads covered with snow or ice the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels drive wheels Use tire chains only on the front original tires Maintenance and do it yourself 8 45 Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear e Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles e Do not use more than one spare t
375. st the level Do not adjust the Brightness Contrast Tint and Color of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to R Re verse the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Monitor screen is displayed com pletely When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R Reverse it may take some time until the screen changes Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object When the contrast of objects is low at night pressing the SETUP button may not change the brightness Objects on the monitor may not be clear ina dark place or at night If dirt rain or snow attaches t
376. ste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc Bluetooth U S A and licensed to Visteon and Xanavi Informatics Corporation XM Radio requires subscription sold separately after first 90 days Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit www xmradio com ean 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification numb
377. stems WHA1078 Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Apple ISO Romeo Joliet SO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported PE MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported Bitrate o rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR Sampling frequency oe 32 kHz 48 kHz Bitrate o rate 48 kbps 192 kbps VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 MP3 only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Max folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian Displayable character codes 2 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed
378. step display If you do not press a button or touch a screen key for more than 1 minute on the START UP screen the screen will change to the audio screen auto matically To proceed to the next step refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual ESettings 8 21 Display Phone Clock Volume Tones Zi Navigation iM Voice Recognition Language Units HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON When the SETUP button is pressed the settings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Touch one of the setting item keys to select each item to be set Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 3 Settings gt Display 8 21 Back Display Brightness IDI B Contrast E i Please select an item Display settings Touch the Display key The display screen will appear Display brightness contrast Touch the key or the key to adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by touching the Back key or pressing any other mode button Push DAY NIGHT switch to resume display Display off Touch the Display ON key The indicator of the display turns off touch the Back key to accept the change The message above will be dis played briefly When the audio or
379. ster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION AWARNING NISSAN recommends that booster seats be installed in the rear seat However if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat move the passenger s seat to the rearmost position A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt Auto matic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat w
380. switch is in the OFF position See Cancel switch later in this section Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 201 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when lt has run for 25 seconds or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key To deactivate Press and hold the and ir buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and A buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in t
381. t Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 4 103 Ib 1861 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 4 203 Ib 1906 kg Maximum Towing Load from Towing Load Specification chart 1 000 lb 454 kg 4 203 Ib 1906 kg 4 103 lb 1861 kg GVWR GVW 100 Ib 45 kg Available for tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Capacity available for towing 100 Ib 45 kg Available tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the av
382. t covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however
383. t without the booster seat AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 19 WRS0738
384. t Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap pears in the display Press the TUNE FF FREW amp or VY to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the TUNE FF REW button to adjust Fade and Balance mode Fade adjusts the sound level be tween the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker To turn the Beep sound off or on press the AUDIO button until Beep is displayed Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y until the desired mode is displayed This turns on or turns off the beep sound when audio buttons are pressed To change the Speed Sensitive Volume mode to OFF LOW MID or HIGH press the TUNE FF REW button Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds Clock operation Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock with the radio on or off Press the CLOCK button again to turn off the clock display 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Clock set 1 Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap proximately 2 seconds 2 The display will show H Seek M Tune 3 Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or to adjust the hours TUNE FF REW button 4 to adjust the minutes 4 Press or 5 Press the CLOCK button
385. t and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are
386. t may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases Adjustable seatbacks should be posi tioned to fit the booster seat but as upright as possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child s arm If you must install a booster seat in the front seat see Booster seat installation later in this section When your booster seat is not in use keep it secured with a seat belt to pre vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident A CAUTION Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the boo
387. t possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts The ex tender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required AWARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the Original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work prop
388. t reduced If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drasti cally decrease the light will start blink ing or the color of the light will be come reddish If one or more of the above signs appear contact a NISSAN dealer LIC1085 Type A HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting A When turning the switch to the gt 4 posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on 2 When turning the switch to the 22 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on Instruments and controls 2 29 LIC1064 LIC1063 Type B A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery 2 30 Instruments and controls Type C Autolight system if so equipped The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Push the push button ignition switch to the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially
389. t use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels Appearance and care 7 3 e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing 7 4 Appearance and care Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and
390. tc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine 9 4 Technical and consumer information Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel Consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is not a cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system co
391. tch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then push the switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal op erating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary AWARNING When the high fluid temperature protec tion mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially care ful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op eration or have it repaired if necessary Starting and driving 5 15 MANUAL TRANSMISSION if so equipped AWARNING Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control Do not over rev the engine when shift ing to a lower gear This may cause a loss of control or engine damage A CAUTION Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving This may cause clutch damage Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage e Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R Reverse When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running for example at a stop light shift to N Neutral and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied 5 16 Starting and driving Shifting
392. te BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is d
393. tes if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door or trunk lid with the key or by pressing the M button on the Intelli gent Key instruments and controls 2 25 The alarm is activated by opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door or the trunk lid with the key pressing the M button onthe Intelligent Key or press ing the request switch on the driver s or passen ger s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key Never leave these keys in the vehicle Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 2 26 Instruments and controls 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER
394. tes whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless T The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
395. tgoing call list Downloaded Phonebook Choose from a list of stored numbers that have been transferred from your phonebook to your vehicle Dial Keypad Input the phone number manually 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Fill 8 21 Back o r Incoming Call 1 800 555 1212 Answer Hold Call amp Reject Call Please select an item RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to phone mode To receive a call follow the two procedures listed below a Touch the Answer key on the display b Press the phone button on the steering wheel switches There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen Answer Accept an incoming call to talk Hold Call Continue to hold call Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Touch the Reject Call key on the display b Press and hold the phone button onthe steering wheel switches Fill 8 21 Back Hang Up gt 0 03 Call in Progress HOME My Phone Number 1 586 555 1212 Zz Handset m Enter Digit Please select an item DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary H
396. th the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO0454 Front passenger position Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point seat belt with retrac tor earlier in this section If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat push the ignition switch to the ON position The front passenger air bag status light amp may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the following systems e Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force t
397. the ignition switch is in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located on the instrument panel above the radio controls The light operates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto
398. the radio will come on at the station last played No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM satellite radio service subscription Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception TUNE FOLDER tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER tuning knob to the right or left Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 A bd SEEK TRACK tuning button Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or Y for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station Scan tuning key Touch the Scan key SCAN illuminates in the display window Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies Scan tuning stops for 5 sec onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi cient signal strength Touching the Scan key again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station Station memory operations 18 st
399. the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installa tion 4 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat consult your NISSAN dealer for de tails CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cush ion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH an chors are obstructed USING LATCH Front facing Follow these steps to install a front facing child restraint using LATCH system AWARNING Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown For the LATCH lower anchor locations see LATCH Lower Anchors and Teth ers for CHildren system If a child re straint is not secured properly your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident e The LATCH anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplement
400. the battery with anew one See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Steering lock release malfunction indica tor This indicator illuminates when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK posi tion If this indicator illuminates push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left SECURITY SYSTEMS Your vehicle may have two types of security sys tems Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to s
401. the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid PUSH STARTING A CAUTION e Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged e Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage For manual transmission models never try to start the vehicle by towing it When the engine starts the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire
402. the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds DISP display button Pressing the DISP display button will show text about CD information in the audio display If the text information is to long to fully be dis played on the screen press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1 5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Track number and Track time Album title Song title Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc Track time displays the amount of time the track has played Album title displays the title of the CD being played Song title displays the title of the selected CD track Clock operation Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock with the radio on or off Press the CLOCK button again to turn off the clock display 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Clock set 1 Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap proximately 2 seconds 2 The display will show H Seek M Tune 3 Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or to adjust the hours 4 Press TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y _ to adjust the minutes 5 Press the CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode The display will
403. the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster 2 28 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS if so equipped AWARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE e When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xe non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head lights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily blind an oncom ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal Even when the daytime running lights are active Canada only the xenon headlights do not turn on This way the life of the xenon head lights is no
404. tor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 008 5 2 Three way catalyst ncecccceeceeeeecderaedemaxcka 5 2 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 0045 5 5 Off road recovery a2i46 soniaesieecaweenerse aye 5 6 Rapid air pressure loSS cece eee eee 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 7 Push Button lgnition SWHCK 624s saeesvesaewataaed 5 7 Push button ignition switch positions 5 8 NISSAN Intelligent key battery discharge 5 8 Before starting the engine 20 5 5 10 Starting the engine 0e eee eee eee eee 5 10 Driving the VENICle 22405259342 e2c2s2ceaeeneagerne nd 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Or SO CCUIDDed comsecsteacenecescusmeosacnases 5 11 Manual transmission if so equipped 5 16 Pakinga Drako ceresna sirrettiin 5 18 Da Ee a PET E eae ekes 5 19 Precautions on cruise control 5 19 Cruise control operations 2 002 0 5 19 Break in schedule 22 0 eee eee eee eee 5 20 Increasing fuel economy 0000e eee ee 5 21 Parking parking on hills aana 5 22 Pow r SlectInG s2cecrued aveeteoueee iah aer 5 23 Brake Syste genera eetersceeneeneeeaoeeauy oeteted 5 23 Brake prec
405. toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked WPDO0291 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 WPD0381 Door lock switch LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open all doors will lock and unlock automatically With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle not in the Intelligent Key port and any door open all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition switch is placed in the OFF position The automatic lock and unlock functions can be deactivated or activated indepen dently of each other
406. tween the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Press the CS button to the OFF position 2 Press the 7 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion air flow control button 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows 1 Press the defrost defog button GW 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the win dows turn the fan control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position When the 7 position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on however the indicator light on the E button will not come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF the vehicle is shut off or the A C button is used to turn off the compressor even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than the 7 position This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The mode automatically turns off al lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas senge
407. ty indicator light SLIP Slip indicator light if so equipped ue Traction Control System off indicator light if so equipped Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light if so equipped If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly WARNING LIGHTS r Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion r O Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running wit
408. u can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag handle will cause the Intelligent Key system When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door gent Key is outside the vehicle handle request switch within the range of opera tion After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the trunk opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle WPD0433 The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Coupe shown Sedan similar NOTE Locking doors Doors lock with the door handle request Lockout protection 1 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi switch while the ignition switch is not in the tion place the ignition switch in the LOCK LOCK position To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci position and make sure you carry the Intelli Doors do not lock by pushing the door dentally locked in the vehicl
409. udio opera tion precautions earlier in this section No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM satellite radio service subscription Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands Reference symbols RADIO button This is a button on the radio By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action Display key This is a select key on the touch screen By touching this key you can proceed to the next function Audio main operation ON OFF VOL control Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position then press the ON OFF VOL control knob while the audio system is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immedi ately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the ON OFF VOL control knob Turn the ON OFF VOL control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes AUDIO knob Bass Treble Balance Fade and SSV Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade Audio Bass To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
410. udio settings see Audio System later in this section Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Xd BUTTON To change the display brightness press the 2 button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day Ei or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted by touching the keyorthe key If no operation is done within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view directly to the rear of the vehicle AWARNING The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is in stalle
411. uld become involved in seri ous accidents 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Manual transmission models Place the shift selector in the R Reverse position When parking on an uphill grade place the shift selector in 1st gear Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline It is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to opera
412. um of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sunload sensor located on the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment AUDIO SYSTEM if so equipped RADIO With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi tion press the PWR power VOL volume knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with th
413. unning light system Canada only 2 32 Instrument brightness control 0005 2 32 Turm signal SWC cscch tev anendaeke EENE 2 33 Fog light switch if so equipped 85 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 0000 eeu 2 33 POC Mex veo ceree nee e gece aaee as eke ess 2 34 Heated seat if so equipped n n nann ccc eee eee eee 2 34 Traction Control System TCS off switch if so equipped tcanvane cae uaesnduteed dui eenend owe 2 35 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch PSO CQUIDDER 5i lt dcerec eet aeswachieueeeessdiewes 2 35 Power outlet 23 anc Sene eer dateenawasuateysenecwans 2 36 Sire ela aus ne ns ce aevecasen ceeaed oeeaeen ceases 2 37 Map POCKElS cceenee reese geseestie es cateeent 2 37 Seatback pockets if so equipped 2 37 Storage pouch if so equipped 06 2 38 Sunglasses HOME axcnitiewa dheadeeatreueeeunas 2 38 CUD holders ecbacectaasieccatencecseseees tenes 2 40 COVE BOX ou chee cape ne E 2 41 Console DOK so a5ce need ep heria Nen EnA ESSEER AS 2 41 Storage box if so equipped 00 cease 2 42 Covered storage box 20 cece eee eee eee 2 42 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 51 Grocery hooks if so equipped 005 2 43 Programming HomeLink 00cee eee e ee 2 51 Cargo net if so equipped nanana nn 9 43 Programming HomeLink for Canadian VWVINOOWSccaenscusurongeehenuuerenueares
414. ure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged e Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident 5 18 Starting and driving A LSD0158 Type A To engage Type A firmly depress the parking brake Type B pull the lever up To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Manual transmission models Place the shift selector in the N Neutral position CVT models Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion RaO Om WSD0169 Type B 3 Type A firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release Type B while pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly push the button and lower completely 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out CRUISE CONTROL CANCEL switch ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch a i 4 ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL lf the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver e f the SET indicator light blinks turn the cruise control switch off and have the sys tem checked by a NISSAN dealer The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is turned ON
415. used with a new name The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Q microphone location Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have an ap proved Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 module when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried i
416. ve more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 10 the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor the retractor is in the ALR mode Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 9 11 WRS0475 Front facing step 11 If the child restraint is installed in the front WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Rear facing passenger seat push the ignition switch to the ON position The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted t
417. ve the fasteners Carefully push back the carpet 2 Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear combination light 3 Rotate the bulb s counterclockwise and pull out to remove A Turn signal light Sidemarker light Tail stop light Backup light Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 WDI0343 Trunk light 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitor ing System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V
418. ven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section AWARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon
419. void fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be ad versely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress WD10258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section of this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Informat
420. w water to contact the outlet WIC1262 Console box Open the lower half of the console box to access the power outlet Refer to Console box in this section STORAGE MAP POCKETS LIC0016 SEATBACK POCKETS if so equipped The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver s and passenger s seats The pockets can be used to store maps instruments and controls 2 37 A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than 00 000 sunglasses j Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses STORAGE POUCH if so equipped SUNGLASSES HOLDER A storage pouch is located on the front of the driver s and passenger s seats To open the sunglasses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder A WARNING A WARNING Do not store angular sharp heavy objects z or Objects that cannot fully fit inside the RER R B areas S SE pouch because they might increase the Stee i likelihood of an injury in a crash 2 38 Instruments and controls L LIC Front Type A Front Type B Rear sedan Instruments and controls 2 39 LICI219 Rear coupe CUP HOLDERS To open the front cup holders push the cup holder lid To close lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place The plastic insert if so equipped may be re moved to accommodate a larger cu
421. way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 Numbers can be spoken in small groups See List of voice commands and Interna The system will prompt you to continue en tional later in this section for more informa tering digits if desired tion Example 1 800 662 6200 Example 1 555 1212 123 one two three The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more NOTE six six two For best results say phone numbers as The system repeats the numbers and single digits prompts you to enter more The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system Say pound for Say star for avail CONTROL BUTTONS able when using the Call International six two zero zero kkk command and the Send command durin
422. wer to the moon roof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch toward 1 To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward LS 2 To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof Close the moonroof by pushing the switch toward lt gt 2 Release the switch then push the switch toward again to tilt the moonroof up To tilt the moonroof down push the switch toward lt gt D A WARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Resetting the moonroof switch The moonroof switch may not operate properly and need to be reset if any of the following conditions have occurred the moonroof has been manually moved the moonroof motor has been removed and reinstalled after the moonroof has been re positioned or adjusted the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted or changed or the electrical supply interrupted and or some malfunction
423. while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To properly set the cruise control system use the following proce dures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed e On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed e To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Pushthe CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the instrume
424. witch 2 45 Fog ight SWitGh 4 2 ies hoe ee 2d 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 29 Power door lock switch 3 5 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC s 2 ao ae oO a e eee ee 2 28 Traction control system TCS off SWIC 2 4 6 464 Boor 8 ee ea ee 2 35 Turn signal switch 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWIC 20344 a ahtrakerecad ds 2 35 T Tachometer a 4c Ace es oo eh ye eee ee eG 2 5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 04 2 26 3 3 Three way catalyst 2 ee ee 5 2 Tire Flat ties oe 6 Be oe oe eR Fore N a 6 2 Spare tire i ec ee eee 6 3 8 45 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Tih CNGINSs osad 6 x ad see we Ses 8 42 Tire placard 2 sa he ea ee oe Se Be 9 11 Tire pressure cov kee w e a aaa 8 34 Tirerotation 2004 8 43 Types of tires athe eee amp amp ae amp o 8 41 Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 10 6 Wheels andtires 8 34 Wheel tire size 2 00048 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Top tether strap child restraint 1 27 Towing Flat tOWINg occ oe aoas ae on a a a 9 23 Tow truck towing 6 6 0 2 2 ace eet oo 6 10 Towing l
425. with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock button 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position 1 13 Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS f a E Sit upright and well back PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every ti
426. y Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 Technical and consumer information 9 25 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system Component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle
427. y may interfere with side air bag inflation 1 49 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Coupe 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system FY gS WRS0844 Sedan Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag inflators Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules Air bag Control Unit ACU Supplemental front impact air bag mod ules Crash zone sensor Seat belt buckle switches on driver s and passenger s side Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor Occupant classification system control unit Seat belt with pretensioner Side satellite sensor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag Is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions althou
428. y the instant fuel economy since the last reset display the average miles per gallon and miles per show the time and distance driven since the last hour since the last reset reset 2 18 Instruments and controls Range mode The range mode can be selected to give you an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The range is constantly calcu lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption OUTSIDE TEMP 68 F Exterior Temperature mode The exterior temperature mode can be selected to provide you with the temperature outside of your vehicle SETTING ein gt MAINTENANCE gt ALERT gt DISPLAY GENTER NEXT Setting mode The setting mode allows you to set reminders or preferences for alerts maintenance intervals or language displays In the setting mode screen press to move to Alert Maintenance e Display and press to select the menu Instruments and controls 2 19 ALERT pa 710 gt TIME TO REST gt ICY QENTER NEXT Alert mode The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying you of time to rest or icy conditions The time to rest alert lets you know when you have been traveling for a long time and may need a break The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi tions may exist 2 20 Instruments and controls XXXX pa a JAN OL sf gt SETTING gt RESET GENTER NEXT Reset mode The reset mode can be se
429. you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the amp F button on the steering wheel However if you press the amp F button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session Call Main Menu Call or Call International Name speak name A Number speak digits Redial Call Back Name speak name If you have stored entries in the Phone Book you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phone book later in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Number speak digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number earlier in this section for more details Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle NOTE The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 If a redial number does not exist the syst
430. ystem ae ae ee oe woe 4 28 4 32 Clockset 0 4 5 4 28 4 32 Clutch Ciuteh fuid s 2 s s a 5 eee ee 8 14 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Cold weather driving 5 27 Compact disc CD player 4 29 Compass display 4 2 6 Console DOX sa sas saa a da ea be de ws 2 41 Console light aaa aaa 2 49 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVI Tidy sa see aa ee en ee dad 8 13 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 00 5 11 Transmission selector lever lock release 2 a a 5 14 Control panel buttons Brightness contrast button 4 7 Setup button 006 4 3 Startup screen 2 cae eee dee wea as 4 3 With navigation system 4 2 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls 8x ane wea HR Oo 4 11 4 18 Coolant Capacities and recommended TUCIIUDFICANISS o ss ced moe woke w oS 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 9 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Corrosion protection osoo a 7 6 Cr ise CONWOl s saa sewa eaga 5 19 10 2 Cup holders se scr sa awa bale em dem a Daytime running light system Canada only Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWC oa amp si ee Se a RE Dimensions and weights Dimmer switch for instrument panel Display controls see control pa

Nissan 2009 Altima Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents